sirius safety systems—safety integrated position switches
TRANSCRIPT
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/00
13/1
Control Circuit ComponentsSIRIUS Safety Systems—Safety Integrated Position Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Contents Pages
Safety & Position Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . .13/2–13/5
Safety Systems—Safety SwitchesThe Need for Machine Safety Products . . . . . . .13/6–13/12Glossary of Safety Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/13Reference for Additional Informationon Machine Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/143TK28 Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/15–13/223TK28 Solid State Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . .13/23–13/28Starters with Integrated Safety . . . . . . . . . . . .13/29–13/33Cable-operated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/34–13/39Interlock Switches with Separate Actuator . . .13/40–13/47Interlock Switches with Locking . . . . . . . . . . .13/48–13/54Magnet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/55–13/59Two-Hand Control on Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/60Hinge Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/61–13/63Switches with Integrated AS-Interface . . . . . .13/64–13/68
Position Switches3SE International (IEC) Limit SwitchesMolded Plastic Enclosure,31 mm & 50 mm Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/69–13/81Molded Plastic Enclosure,40 mm Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/82–13/84Metal Enclosure,40 mm and 56 mm Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/85–13/114Open Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/99Metal Enclosure with Molded Cable . . . . . .13/115–13/116
Positive Position Switches that display this symbolopening are suitable for use in safety applications.
3SE03 North American (NEMA) Limit SwitchesModular, Plug-in Metal Housing . . . . . . . . . .13/117–13/119NEMA type 6P Submersible,Prewired Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/120NEMA type 6P Submersible,Prewired Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/121Modular, Plug-in and NEMA 6PSubmersible as Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/122Levers for Plug-in and NEMAtype 6P Submersible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/123–13/1243SE03 North American Enclosed Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13/129–13/130
06IC13_001-006.qxd 2/3/06 7:20 PM Page 13/1
13/2
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/0
3TK28 safety relays 3TK solid state safety relays Starters with integrated safety
For monitoring of EMERGENCY-STOP, protective doors and forpress controls using relays,single-channel or 2-channel
For monitoring of EMERGENCY-STOP and protective doors
3RA7 up to 22Afor mounting on rail systems
Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data13/20, 13/21 Selection and ordering data 13/26 Selection and ordering data13/31, 13/32• Accessories 13/21
Description 13/17 Description 13/17Overview 13/18 Overview 13/23 Overview 13/29Technical data 13/19 Technical data 13/24, 13/25 Technical data 13/30Dimension drawings 13/22 Dimension drawings 13/27, 13/28 Dimension drawings 13/33
Cable-operated switches, molded plastic and metal enclosures
Position switches with separate actuator, molded plastic and metal enclosures
Position switches with lock, molded plastic and metal enclosures
For cable lengths from 6 m to 2 x 50 m, for pulling from one or both ends, latching acc. to EN 418
Switch width 31 mm acc. to EN 50 047, switch width 40 mm acc. to EN 50 041, special width 52 mm
4 contacts
Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data 13/35 Selection and ordering data 13/4213/4313/44
Selection and ordering data 13/5013/5113/52
• Accessories 13/36
Description 13/34 Description 13/40 Description 13/48Overview 13/34 Overview 13/41 Overview 13/49Technical data 13/34 Technical data 13/42, 13/45 Technical data 13/53Dimension drawings 13/37 Dimension drawings 13/45, 13/47 Dimension drawings 13/54
3TK28 21–28 basic units,3TK28 30 expansion units,3TK28 34 + 35 press control units
3TK28 40 – 453TK28 50 – 57 with floating, positively-driven contacts
3RA7
3SE7 1 3SE 2120, 3SE. 200, 3SE 2243,3SE 2257, 3SE 3170
3SE3 7, 3SE3 8 3SE2 8
06IC13_001-006.qxd 2/3/06 5:24 PM Page 13/2
13/3
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/1
Magnetic switches Hinge switches, molded plastic and metal enclosures
Two-hand operation consoles, press control units
Switching magnets, switchblocks and monitoring unitsfor safety functions
Enclosure acc. to EN 50 047 and EN 50 041
Control consoles with metal and molded plastic enclosures
Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data 13/57 Selection and ordering data 13/62 Selection and ordering data 13/60
Description 13/55 Description 13/61 Description 13/60Technical data 13/56 Technical data 13/61 Dimension drawings 13/60Connection examples 13/59 Travel 13/63Dimension drawings 13/58 Dimension drawings 13/63
Switches with integratedAS-Interface
Page
Selection and ordering data 13/65,13/66,13/67,13/68
Overview 13/64
3SE6 704-1BA
3SE6 605-3BA3SE6 704-3BA
3SE6 605-2BA
3SE6 704-2BA
3SE6 605-1BA
3SE2 2833SE2 2003SB38 6
3SF3 3SF2
06IC13_001-006.qxd 2/3/06 5:28 PM Page 13/3
13/4
Other safety integrated components
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/2
8WA42, 8WA44Signal Columns –See Section 10
3SB EMERGENCY-STOPControl Devices –See Section 10
8WD53 Built-inSignal Beacons –See Section 10
AS-Interface:Safety at Work –See Section 14
3RH12 & 3RT10..-3MA0Safety Control Relaysand Contactors –See Section 2
3RT1 Contactors –See Section 2
3RV1 Motor StarterProtectors –See Section 1
3LD2 Rotary DisconnectSwitches –See Section 18
3RG78 Light Curtains, Light Barriers andOptical Safety Switch Strips –See Catalog FS10, Factory Automation Sensors
06IC13_001-006.qxd 2/20/06 6:59 PM Page 13/4
13/5
Position Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/3
Position switches, molded plastic enclosure
Position switches, metal enclosure
Position switches, open type
Switch width 31 mm acc. to EN 50 047, switch width 40 mm acc. to EN 50 041 special width 50 mm
Switch width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041, special width 56 mm
2 or 3 contacts, switch width 30 mm
Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data13/71,13/82 Selection and ordering data 13/87 Selection and ordering data 13/99• Actuator heads 13/75, 13/83 • Actuator heads 13/95, 13/96• Accessories, spare parts 13/98 • Accessories, spare parts 13/98
99/31noitpircseD58/31noitpircseD96/31noitpircseDTechnical data 13/70 Technical data 13/86 Technical data 13/86Operation & travel 13/76, 13/84 Operation, travel 13/100 Operation & travel 13/99, 13/112Dimension drawings 13/81, 13/84 Dimension drawings 13/113 Dimension drawings 13/114
Position switches, metal enclosure, with molded cable
North American limit switches, modular, pre-wired, metal housing
North American enclosed limit switches
Compact switch, switch widths 30 and 40 mm
Switch width 39 mm
Page Page Page
Selection and ordering data 13/115 Selection and ordering data 13/119 Selection and ordering data 13/12913/130
• Actuator heads 13/122• Accessories, spare parts 13/122
321/31srotautcA•921/31noitpircseD711/31noitpircseD511/31noitpircseD
Technical data 13/115 Technical data 13/118 Technical data 13/130Operation & travel 13/115 Operation & travel 13/122 Operation & travel 13/129, 13/130Dimension drawings 13/116 Dimension drawings 13/126 Dimension drawings 13/129, 13/130
3SE2 20, 3SE2 21, 3SE2 23 3SE. 1, 3SE2 3, 3SE2 4 3SE3 020 3SE3 023
3SE3 160 3SE3 180Enclosed switch
06IC13_001-006.qxd 2/10/06 1:30 PM Page 13/5
13/6
Why do you want to use machine safety products?Are you a global supplier?Are you aware of the Machinery Directive? The Machinery Directive was implemented in 1993 in the European market to harmonize the national standards and regulations of all of the European Communities. The definition of a machine according to the Machinery Di-rective is:"Machinery also means an assembly of ma-chines which, in order to achieve the same end, are arranged and controlled so that they function as an integral whole."Basically, the Machinery Directive defines the objectives of machine design in terms of the basic health and safety requirements mandatory for the safety of new machines so that they may be sold within the European Union. The manufacturer of a machine must prove that the basic requirements are ful-filled. The CE mark is the only marking which certifies that the industrial product conforms to the EU machinery directive. (See Figure 1.)
The key requirements of the EU are:• A file must be established containing the
technical construction of the machine.• The machinery’s compliance must be
certified with the technical requirements.• An instruction manual must be provided
with each machine.To obtain the requirements for the CE mark, the Machinery Directive describes the steps for the machine builder.Siemens’ SIRIUS safety devices have been specifically designed to meet and exceed the stringent safety requirements mandated by the European Machinery Directive 98/37/EC for machine safety.(For further explanation of the Machinery Di-rective and Standards, reference the SIE-MENS Safety Integrated Application Manual).The European Standards of CENa for the safety of machines are hierarchically struc-tured as follows:
What are the main CE-Standards according to Machine Safety?• Type A Standards: Fundamental safety
standards giving basic terminology and general design principles that can be applied to all machines.
• Type B Standards: Group safety standards dealing with one aspect or one type of safety related device that can be used across a wide range of machinery. Type B Standards are divided into higher level aspects (B1-Standards) and safety devices (B2-Standards).
• Type C Standards: Requirements regarding to a specific group of machinery
Type C Standards often include require-ments which, under certain circumstances, deviate from the Basic- and Group Standards. For the ma-chine OEM, type C Standards have the high-est priority.
Declaration of conformity / CE-Mark
Meetharmonized
EN-Standards?
Annex IV98/37/EC
Self-operative machine to in
optional
Verification(by notified body)
or certification
Certification
Mfr . documentation (self - certification )
acc . to Annex V
yesno
yesno
referred
CEN: European Committee for Standardization
Figure 1: Evaluation Process for Obtaining the CE Mark
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/04
06IC13_001-006.qxd 10/18/05 8:56 AM Page 13/6
13/7
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/05
Type A standardsEN 292 Basic principles, general design principlesEN 1050 Risk assessmentEN 414 Rules for elaboration and presentation of safety standards
Type C standards
Type B1 standards Type B2 standards
EN 60204 Machines-electrical equipmentEN 954 Safety related parts of control systemsEN 294 Safety distances to prevent upper limbs from
reaching danger zonespr EN 811 Safety distances to prevent lower limbs from
reaching danger zonespr EN 999 Hand/arm speed – approach speeds of parts of
the human body for positioning protective de-vices
IEC/EN 61496-1 Electrosensitive protective equipmentgeneral requirements
IEC/pr EN 61496-2 Electrosensitive protective equipment-active optoelectronic area protective devices
EN 1760 Pressure-sensitive protective devicesEN 1088 Locking and interlocking devicesEN 418 Emergency stopping equipmentEN 574 Two-hand controlsIEC/EN 60947-5-1 Electromechanical control circuit devices
Cold working of metalspr EN 692 Mechanical pressespr En 693 Hydraulic pressesMachines for plastic and rubberpr EN 201 Injection presses, injection moulding machinespr EN 289 Compression and transfer pressespr EN 1114 Extrusion machines and extrusion linespr EN 1417 Two-cylinder mixerspr EN 422 Mould blowing machinesPackaging machinespr EN 415-2 Machines for pre-formed rigid packagingpr EN 415-3 Form, fill and seal machinespr EN 415-4 Palletizers, depalletizerspr EN 415-5 Wrapping machinespr EN 415-6 Machines to form collective packagingpr EN 415-7 Machines to ensure cohesion of load unitsGraphic and paper machinespr EN 1010 Graphic machinespr EN 1034 Paper machines
Machines for woodpr EN 691 Common requirementspr EN 859 Surfacing machines with manual feedpr EN 860 One-side planing machinespr EN 861 Surfacing and planing combined ma-
chinespr EN 1807 Bandsawspr EN 848 Milling machines with spindlepr En 940 Combined machinespr EN 1218 Tenoning machinesTanning machinespr EN 972 Reciprocating machine with rollerpr EN 1035 Machines with mobile tablespr EN 930 Carding, sandpapering, polishing and
milling machinespr EN 931 Assembling, folding, nailing machinesMiscellaneouspr EN 11553 Safety of laser machines for treatment of
slairetam EN 775 Safety of manipulating robotspr EN 1525 Industrial trucks without drivers and their
systems
06IC13_007-012.qxd 10/19/05 6:34 PM Page 13/7
SiemIndus
13/8
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/06
Are your customers requiring safety de-signs for their machines?Have you been asked or required to imple-ment safety in the design of new machines? With an increased concern for personnel safety and required legal standards, incor-porating safety has become a priority in the US market.There are many organizations that affect safety in the US. Two such bodies oversee-ing the "control reliability" of machinery in the United States are the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and the Occupa-tional Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). ANSI is an association of industry representatives who, working together, de-velop safety and technical standards. OSHA is a government agency responsible for monitoring and regulating workplace safety. ANSI and OSHA have provided the following definitions for control reliability:"Control reliability" means that when a com-ponent, module, device or system failure oc-curs, such that it or a subsequent failure of another component, module, device or sys-tem would lead to the inability of the safety-related function(s) to respond to a normal stop command or an immediate stop com-mand, the safety-related function shall:• Prevent initiation of hazardous machine
motion (or situation) until the failure is corrected or until the control system is manually reset; or,
• Initiate an immediate stop command and prevent re-initiation of hazardous machine motion (or situation) until the failure is corrected or until the control system is manually reset; or,
• Prevent re-initiation of hazardous machine motion (or situation) at the next normal stop command until the failure is corrected or until the control system is manually reset. (ANSI B11.19 -- 2003, 6.1)
"The control system shall be constructed so that a failure within the system does not pre-vent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when required but does prevent initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be detectable by a simple test, or indicated by a control system." (OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217)OSHA regulations and definitions for ma-chine safety can be found in OSHA 1910. ANSI standards for machine safety can be found in ANSI B11 series.
Where is safety used today?• Automotive Industry• Pulp, Paper, and Paperboard Mills• Packaging and Wrapping Industry• Machine Tooling• Molding and Power Presses• Robotic Work Cells• Automated Production Equipment• Pipe, Tube and Shape Bending Machines• Gear Cutting Machines• Metal Sawing Machines• Assembly Lines
Most common applications for safeguard-ing machines:• Emergency-STOP Circuit• Protected Doors or Gates• Sliding Edges• Access Protection• Perimeter Protection• Two-Hand Control
06IC13_007-012.qxd 10/20/05 5:42 PM Page 13/8
13/9
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/07
Is increased safety for your personnel and equipment a priority?
As a result of their general design and functionality, machine and plants represent potential risks. Risk assessment is a sequence of steps which allows hazards caused by machines to be systematically investigated. Risk is a function of the severity of possible harm for the considered hazard and the probability of occurrence of that harm. The following Standards may be applied to assess risks:
EN 292 "Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for design." This standard mainly handles the risks to be evaluated and design principle to reduce risks.
EN 1050 "Safety of machinery – Principle for risk assessment." This standard basically handles the iterative process with risk assessment and risk reduction to achieve safety.
EN 954 "Safety related parts of control systems." This standard provides the safety requirements and guidance for the design of the safety related parts of control systems. It gives guidance on the specification, design process and validation including the selection of categories as reference points.
After following the risk assessment process (see Figure 2), a risk category or level of risk can be assigned. The requirements of the safety related parts of the control system are then determined from the risk category. Risk Assessment in America for machine tools is covered by the ANSI B11 TR3 part of the ANSI B11 series of technical reports and standards pertaining to the design, construction, care and use of machine tools. The ANSI B11 TR3 report defines a method of conducting a risk assessment and risk reduction for machine tools, provides some guidance in the selection of appropriate protective measures (safeguarding) to achieve tolerable risk, and describes the risk assessment and risk reduction responsibilities of both the machine tool supplier and user.
Risk Assessment in America for robotic applications is covered by the ANSI / RIA 15.06.
(Please refer to the SIEMENS Safety Integrated Application Handbook for furtherinformation regarding Risk Assessment).
S - Severity of the injury
F - Frequency and /or exposure timeto the hazardous condition
P - Possibility of avoiding the hazard
S1
S2
F1
F2
P1
P2
P2
P1
(slight, normally reversible injury)
(severe, normally irreversible injuryincluding death)
(seldom)
(frequent to continous)
(possible)
(scarcely possible)
(scarcely possible)
(possible)
relevant risk
Preferred categories for reference points
Possible categories requiring further stepsMeasures which can beoverdimensioned for the
::
:
Figure 2: Risk Assessment Acc. to EN954-1
Categories for safety relatedparts of control systems
06IC13_007-012.qxd 11/29/05 8:00 AM Page 13/9
SiemIndus
13/10
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/08
What makes a system safe?
Many components make up a safety system. A safety device may consist of a sensor or switch, which initiates the "safety condition." Switches or sensors used in safety circuits are control devices with high reliability. They interrupt the control circuit of the machine in order to create a safe condiiton.
Devices with "direct opening action" contacts are specified in circuits where the safety of machine operators and equipment depend on the opening of one or more contacts when actuated in safety situations. Devices meeting these requirements are marked with the symbol shown below and must be installed in circuits protected by a short-circuit protective device specified by the manufacturer. This will avoid welding of the contact in case of a fault condition.
Devices with "direct opening action" contacts:• Emergency-Stop Pushbuttons• Limit Switches, All Types • Rope-Pull Switches• Foot Switches
The term, positive opening operation, was previously used in the IEC and EN standard, but is now replaced by the term "direct opening action."
Redundancy is incorporated in the safety circuit to ensure safety functionality even if a failure disables one channel.
A safety relay unit performs fault detection and evaluation. It opens the circuit when it detects a failure. The feedback loop monitors the correct operation of the output device. In some safety circuits, a start sensor or switch is incorporated to reactivate the safety circuit. See example of the functionality of a safety circuit below. (See Figure 3.)
The overall safety category depends on the components used in the safety circuit as well as on the wiring and installation. Beside the relay units, sensors and contactors also may affect the overall safety category required for the whole circuit.
"Positive opening action" or "mechanical linked contacts" are requirements which are essential for machine safety products. Command devices as well as our SIRIUS contactors meet these requirements and can be used in any safety circuit up to Cat.4, acc. to EN954-1.
For correct wiring examples and usage of the components please refer to the wiring examples and the proper product instruction sheet.
Symbol for Direct Opening Action:
Figure 3: Principle of a Safety Circuit
06IC13_007-012.qxd 11/3/05 9:39 AM Page 13/10
13/11
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/09
What is a “Category” and which impact does it have on the circuitry?
“Category” acc. to EN954-1 is a terminology very often used to express the requirements for a particular safety level. EN954-1 divides the safety levels into 5 Categories (B, 1, 2, 3 and 4) with B being the lowest and 4 the highest level.
All parts and devices, from the origin of the command ultimately down to the lockout or stop of the machine, have to at least meet the requirements of the selected Category.
With the increase of the Category, the degree of the failure detection rises. That entails additional effort in product functionality as well as in wiring.
The following table should give a brief overview of the requirements of each Category:
For safety circuits from Category 3 and higher, EN954-1 requires a redundant structure to avoid the loss of the safety function in case of a failure. This requirement of single fault detection does not mean that all faults will be detected. The accumulation of undetected faults still may lead to an unintended output signal. For Category 4 any single fault should be detected and will not lead to the loss of the safety function.
To meet the requirements acc. to EN954-1 redundancy shall affect every component of the safety circuit. • Two contactors or even two interlocking
switches, wired in series, should be used and connected to the safety relay unit.
• For Category 4 in addition one NC auxiliary contact from each of the two contactors should be integrated in the feedback loop. Without both of these NC contacts wired in series in the feedback loop, the safety circuit is reduced to a maximum Category 3 level.
• The two NC safety contacts for a Emergency-STOP pushbutton should be seperated within two contact blocks
• If manual restart is used the device should be monitored from the safety relay unit.
B
1
2
3
4K2
on K1K2K1
3TK283SB3
onK1
K1
3TK283SB3
onK2K1
3TK28
+-
3SB3
K13TK28
3SB3
M
M
M
M
M
K13SB3Possibility of loss of safety function after a
single fault
Possibility of loss ofsafety function after a
single fault
Possibility of loss of safety function if a fault
appears between 2 test circle
Safety functionmaintained in case of a
single fault.
Safety functionmaintained in case of
multiple faults
Equipment designedaccording to basic principlesintended to ensure reliability
Design based on wellestablished components and
principles
The integrity of the safety function is based upon a periodic
test. A failure should be detected at the following test circle
Accumulation of undetected and non-dangerous faults
may lead to the loss of the safety function
Same as Category 3, but accumulation of undetected faults never leads to the loss
of the safety function
Conventionalrelays
Safety relays;mechanically linked
contacts (direct topening; reliabilbility)
Safety relays;cyclical test
Safety relays;redundancy (dual
channel)
Safety relays;redundancy;
feedback loop;cross fault detection
CategoriesEN 954-1
Consequencesof faults
Requirements of thecontrol system
Circuitry examples (not contractual)
Techniques forcircuitry examples
Table 1: Categories Acc. to EN954-1
06IC13_007-012.qxd 10/18/05 9:29 PM Page 13/11
13/12
The need for machine safety products in totalintegrated automation
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/010
What is the advantage in using SIRIUS in the complete safety application?
Machine Safety, not only because of the existing regulations, is a need in today’s world of total automation. Very often, Machine Safety is considered a separate application serviced only by specially trained personnel with detailed knowledge.
Siemens, as a worldwide solution provider, offers a complete range of standard control products. Safety Integrated, Machine Safety will be integrated within the standard automation process. Siemens strengths include:• Worldwide Certifications• Complete Product Lines• Global Support and Service• Technical Leadership• International Experience
Within our Siemens Safety Integrated product range we will provide the link between standard automation and machine safety.
When setting up a machine design, the potential risk should be determined and reduced to a tolerable level. The particular risk level, called "Category" in the EN954-1 Standard, always refers to the whole safety circuitry of the special part of the machine.
This includes safety related Sensors, Command Devices, Evaluation Units and Contactors. One single product can not meet the intended safety level and does not solve the problem.
Only the combination of correct risk determination, mechanical protection equipment, failsafe evaluation, correct wiring and reliable devices will provide the required solution. (See Figure 4.)
Safety Integrated products encompass:• a wide variety of applications• all levels of machine safety• latest requirements in standardization• electromechanical and optical sensors• complete line of safety relays• wiring and application examples• contactors and circuit breakers designed
for machine safety • applications
and will help your company shape a safer, more productive workplace by integrating machine safety into standard automation processes.
Figure 4: Complete Safety Circuit
06IC13_007-012.qxd 10/19/05 3:18 PM Page 13/12
13/13
General Information
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/143
Glossary:
Access Time: The time taken to access the hazardous machine parts after the initiation of the stop command by the interlocking device, as calculated on the basis of an approach speed chosen for each particular case, taking into account the parameters listed in prEN999, Safety of machinery—The positioning of protective equipment with respect to approach speeds of parts of the human body.
Signaling Output: A non–safety related contact closure or semiconductor output primarily used for signaling component or system status to a PLC, audible alarm or visual indicator (such as a stack light). Also called an "auxiliary contact" or "auxiliary monitoring contact".
ANSI (American National Standards Institute): An association of industry representatives who, working together, develop safety and other technical standards.
BG (Berufgenossenschaft): An independent German insurance agency whose legislative arm recommends industry safety practices. One of many "notified bodies" authorized to certify that safety products comply with all relevant standards.
Category: A classification of the safety related parts of a control system with respect to its resistance to faults and its subsequent behavior in the fault condition, and which is achieved by the structural arrangement of the parts and/or by their reliability.
CE (Conformite Europeene) mark: A symbol (CE) applied to finished products and machinery indicating it meets all applicable European Directives. For electrical and electronic "finished products", such as a safety relay module, these include the Low Voltage Directive and, where relevant, the ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) Directive.
Coded-Safety Magnet Sensor: A two-piece position sensor consisting of an array of reed switches and a multiple magnet array-actuating element. Such devices will only deliver an output signal when the reed switch element is in the presence of a matched, multiple-magnetic field array. Coded- magnet sensors cannot be actuated using a simple magnet. Hence they are far more difficult to defeat/bypass than a simple magnetic switch or proximity sensor.
Control Reliability: The capability of the machine control system, the safeguarding, other control components and related interfacing to achieve a safe state in the event of a failure within their safety related functions.
Declaration of Conformity: A manufacturer's self-certified document, signed by a highly positioned technical manager, which lists all the Standards and Directives to which a product conforms. A Declaration of Conformity is mandatory for all CE-marked products, and for machine components which, if they fail, could lead to a dangerous or hazardous situation on a machine.
Dual-Channel Safety System: A safety control system characterized by two inputs—each connected to one of two independent safety circuits. Dual-channel systems are typically capable of detecting interconnection wiring faults such as open circuits, short-circuits and ground faults. As such they provide a higher level of safety than single-channel systems (see "Redundancy").
European Machinery Directive (EMD) 98/37/EC: A set of machine safety design requirements that must be satisfied to meet the Essential Health and Safety standards established by the European Economic Community. This Directive and other relevant European Directives (such as the Low Voltage Directive, EMC Directive, et al) must be satisfied for the machine to bear the CE mark.
Hazardous Area: An area of a machine or process that presents a potential hazard to personnel.
Monitoring: The checking of system components to detect a failure of a component, subassembly or module that affects the performance of the safety-related functions.
Muting: A temporary automatic suspension of a safety function by safety related parts of the control system.
Notified Body: An independent testing laboratory that a member state has determined to be qualified to perform testing and certification functions relating to specified EU Directives.
OSHA (Occupational Safety Health Administration): A U.S. Department of Labor Federal agency responsible for monitoring and regulating workplace safety. OSHA enforcement may reference their own regulations, as well as those of other industry standards-making groups (e.g. ANSI, NFPA, UL, et al).
Direct Opening Contacts:Normally closed (NC) contacts which, upon actuation, are forced to open by a non-resilient mechanical drive mechanism. Also called "positive-opening" contacts.
Positively-Driven Contacts:Normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts which operate interdependently such that the NO and NC contacts can never be closed at the same time. They are designed such that if one of the contact welds/sticks closed, the other contacts cannot change state. The interdepen-dent operation between NO and NC contacts permits self-checking/ monitoring of the functioning of relays and contactors featuring positive-guided contacts. Hence they are desirable in machine safety circuits where "fail-to-safe" or "control reliability" is desired. Also called "Mechanically Linked" contacts.
Redundancy: The use of multiple means to perform the same function.
Safety Interlock Switch: A switch designed expressly to safely monitor the position of a machine barrier guard. Such switches typically feature positive-break contacts and are designed to be more tamper-resistant than conventional position/presence-sensing switches.
Safety Related Function(s):That portion of the control system or safeguarding device that either eliminates exposure to a hazardous situation or reduces exposure to a hazard or hazard-ous situation to a tolerable level.
Single-Channel Safety System: A safety control system characterized by one safety interlock switch whose normally-closed contact is the sole input to a safety relay module or controlling a motor contactor. Such systems are unable to detect a short circuit failure in the interconnection wiring and are only recommended for addressing Safety Categories B, 1 and 2 (see "Risk Assessment").
Tamper-Resistant: A term applied to safety interlock switches referring to their relative ability to be defeated or bypassed using simple, readily available means such as a screwdriver, paper clip, piece of tape or wire, etc. Switches and sensors designed expressly for use as machine guard safety interlocks are designed to be more "tamper-resistant" than conventional switches/sensors (e.g. proximity switches, reed switches, conventional limit switches).
Two-hand Control Device: An actuating control that requires the concurrent use of the operator’s hands to initiate or control machine motion during the hazardous portion of the machine cycle.
06IC13_013-018.qxd 10/20/05 5:05 PM Page 13/13
SiemIndus
13/14
Reference for additional information on machine safety:
ANSI gro.isna.www//:ptth)etutitsnI sdradnatS lanoitaN naciremA(
OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) http://www.osha.gov
NFPA gro.apfn.www//:ptth)noitaicossA noitcetorP eriF lanoitaN(
TUV moc.vut.su.www//:ptth.cnI .A.N fo dnalniehR
UL moc.lu.www//:ptth)seirotarobaL retirwrednU(
CSA (Canadian Standards Asso ac.asc.www//:ptth)noitaic
CCOHS (Canadian Center for Occupational Health and Safety) http://www.ccohs.ca
IEC hc.cei.www//:ptth)noissimmoC lacinhcetortcelE lanoitanretnI(
ISO (International Organization of Standardization) http://www.iso.com
NIOSH (National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health) http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html
NSC (National Safety C gro.csn.www//:ptth)licnuo
ASSE (American Society of Safe gro.essa.www//:ptth)sreenignE yt
RIA gro.scitobor//:ptth)noitaicossA seirtsudnI citoboR(
BG w//:ptth)netfahcsnessonegsfureb( ww.hvbg.de/e/pages/index.htm
BSI ku.gro.isb.www//:ptth)etutitsnI sdradnatS hsitirB(
CENELEC (European Committee for Standardization) http://www.cenorm.be
moc.sih.labolg.www//:ptthstnemucoD gnireenignE labolG
Siemens Web pages:
ytefas/ed.snemeis.www//:pttheporuE snemeiS
ytefas/moc.snemeis.asu.www//:ptthASU snemeiS
ac.snemeis.www//:ptthadanaC snemeiS
xm.moc.snemeis.www//:ptthocixeM snemeiS
General Information
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/144
06IC13_013-018.qxd 10/19/05 6:21 PM Page 13/14
13/15
Configuration
Classification of a machine in categories acc. to EN 954-1European machinery directive 98/37/EG stipulates that every machine must comply with the applicable guidelines and stan-dards. Measures must be taken to keep the risk to persons below acceptable limits.
In the first step taken, a risk anal-ysis is conducted by the project engineer in accordance with EN 1050. For example,the ambi-ent conditions of the machine have to be considered. Then any overall risk must be evaluated. Risk evaluation must be per-formed in such a manner that the procedure and conclusions can be retraced. The dangers and
possible technical measures for reducing risk must also be spec-ified.Once the extent of the risks has been determined, the category according to which the safety circuits will be designed and im-plemented is specified with the aid of EN 954-1, "Safety-related parts of control systems".
This category defines the techni-cal requirements for the configu-ration of the safety equipment. There are five categories (B, 1, 2, 3 and 4), B (standing for basic category) being the category with the lowest risk and the one which also defines the minimum demands made on the control system.
Possible selection of the categories according to EN 954-1
Selection of the category
B, 1 to 4: Categories for parts of controllers with relevance for safety
Preferred categories for refer-ence points
Possible categories, which demand additional measuresMeasures that may be exces-sive with respect to the partic-ular risk
Summary of the requirements for categories acc. to EN 954-1
Starting point for risk assessment of the safety-related part of the control
S Severity of the injury F Frequency and/or duration of the exposure to danger
P Ability to avert the danger
S1 Minor (usually reversible) injury
F1 From rarely to often and/or short duration of exposure
P1 Possible under certain conditions
S2 Serious (normally irreversible) injury including death
F2 From frequently to constantly and/or long duration of exposure
P2 Hardly possible
Category 1) Summary of requirements System response 2) Principles for achieving safety
B The parts of controllers with relevance for safety and/or their protective devices as well as their components must be designed, constructed, selected, assembled and combined in accordance with the applicable standards in such a way that they can resist the expected external influences.
The occurrence of a fault can result in loss of the safety function.
Mainly characterised by the selection of components.
1 The requirements of B must be met.
Well-proven components and well-proven safety principles must be implemented.
The occurrence of a fault can result in loss of the safety function but the probability of it occurring is less than for Category B.
2 The requirements of B must be met and well-proven safety principles must be implemented.
The safety functions must be tested at regular intervals by the machine controller.
• The occurrence of a fault can result in loss of the safety function between tests.
• The loss of the safety function will be detected by the test.
Mainly characterised by the structure.
3 The requirements of B must be met and well-proven safety principles must be implemented.
Parts with relevance for safety must be implemented such that:
• A single fault in any of these components does not result in loss of the safety function.
• Whenever reasonably possible, the individual fault is detected.
• When the single fault occurs, the safety function is always maintained.
• Some but not all faults are detected.
• An accumulation of undetected faults may lead to loss of the safety function.
4 The requirements of B must be met and well-proven safety principles must be implemented.
Parts with relevance for safety must be implemented such that:
• A single fault in any of these components does not result in loss of the safety function.
• The individual fault is detected during or before the next activation of the safety function or, if this is not possible, an accumulation of faults will not result in loss of the safety function.
• When faults occur, the safety function is always maintained.
• The faults are detected early to prevent loss of the safety function.
1) The categories are not intended to be applied in a specific sequence or hi-erarchy with reference to the safety requirements.
2) The risk assessment will establish whether complete or partial loss of the safety function(s) due to faults is acceptable.
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/126
06IC13_013-018.qxd 11/29/05 8:16 PM Page 13/15
SiemIndus
13/16
Application
Standards for "Safety of ma-chines"• NFPA 79 "Electrical Standard
for Industrial Machinery"• ANSI B11.19 "Performance
Criteria for Safeguarding Machine Tools"
• ANSI B11 TR3 "Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction Associated with Machine Tools"
• EN 60204-1 "Electrical equipment of industrial machines"
• EN 418 "EMERGENCY-STOP equipment, functional aspects, basic design principals"
• EN 574 "Two-hand switching"• EN 954-1 "Safety-related parts
of controls"• EN 1050 "Guidelines for risk
assessment"• EN 1088 "Locking facilities in
combination with isolating protective devices"
• IEC 61508 "Functional safety of electrical/programmable solid-state safety related systems"
Stop categories
Potential dangers posed by a machine must be eliminated as quickly as possible.
As a rule, the "danger-free sta-tus" with respect to hazardous motions is standstill. All 3TK28 Safety Relays are de-energized in the event of danger or a fault, i. e. the machine drives are switched to standstill. The EN 60204 standard requires that every machine must be equipped with the Stop function of Category 0. Stop functions of Categories 1 and/or 2 must be implemented when this is neces-sary for the safety and/or func-tional requirements of the ma-chine.
There are 3 categories of Stop functions:• STOP Category 0:
Shutdown by immediate switch-off of the energy infeed to the machine drives.
• STOP Category 1: Controlled shutdown, whereby the energy infeed to the ma-chine drives is maintained dur-ing shutdown and is only switched off when standstill has been achieved.
• STOP Category 2: Controlled shutdown, whereby the energy infeed to the ma-chine drives is maintained.
The devices support autostart or monitored start depending on their versions.
Autostart
The device is active when the sensor circuit is closed. If the ON button is connected in the return circuit, this will not be monitored for crossover. Crossover moni-toring is not required by EN 954-1 for Categories B, 1, 2 and 3.
If an autostart device is used for Category 4 and EMERGENCY-STOP, the user must ensure that faults are prevented (e. g. by safe routing of the ON button lead) in the ON button circuit.
Monitored start
A safety relay is activated follow-ing power supply failure or safety-related shutdown by pressing the ON button.
For Category 4 in accordance with EN 954-1 it is necessary that the ON/feedback circuit is monitored for crossover.
The ON button must be operated after connecting the sensor lead.
Crossover protection
Crossover protection is the abil-ity of the safety relay to detect faults (e.g. through cable com-pression or ground faults) in the safety chain to be monitored and to suppress the enabling of the enabling circuits until the exter-nal fault has been rectified.
EMERGENCY-STOP
EMERGENCY-STOP devices must have priority over all other functions.
The energy infeed to the ma-chine drives that can cause dan-gerous situations must be switched off as quickly as possi-ble without causing any further danger. Resetting of the drives must not result in restarting of the equipment. EMERGENCY-STOP must either function as a Stop Category 0 or Stop Category 1.
Resetting of the command de-vice must only be possible as a result of a manual action on the command device. Resetting of the command device must not initiate a restart command. Re-starting of the machine must not be possible until all operated po-sitioning components have been reset deliberately and individu-ally by hand (EN 418 "Safety of machines, EMERGENCY-STOP equipment, functional aspects, design guidelines").
The basic units of the 3TK28 Safety Relay can be imple-mented for EMERGENCY-STOP applications up to Category 4 of EN 954-1. Category 3 or 4 of EN 954-1 can be achieved de-pending on the external circuit and routing of the sensor leads.
Protective door monitoring
EN 1088 distinguishes between interlocked, isolating protective devices and interlocked, iso-lating protective devices with locking.
3TK28 Safety Relays are also used in this case for EMER-GENCY-STOP applications. Control systems for up to category 4 of EN 954-1 are pos-sible.
Pressing and stamping
The two-hand control unit is a device that requires both hands of the operator to be used simul-taneously as a means of protect-ing the operator from danger.
The overtravel test apparatus is used with linearly driven presses (e. g. hydraulic, pneumatic and spindle presses) in accordance with VBG 7n5.2. It only tests once on the test stroke for:• Correct connection of the oper-
ation elements• External cable interruption• Any failure of the cyclically
monitored components
The overtravel test unit can only be implemented in conjunction with a two-hand control unit.
The press control units and the overtravel test units are suitable for installation in control systems for eccentric, hydraulic and screw presses. They can be used up to Category 4 of EN 954-1. Type III C acc. to EN 574 is possible specifically for presses.
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/127
06IC13_013-018.qxd 10/21/05 4:11 PM Page 13/16
13/17
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/128
Construction
In the product series 3TK28 21 to 3TK28 27, 3TK28 30, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35 press con-trol units, safety relays with posi-tively-driven contacts are used. This product series is character-ized by its space-saving width (22.5 mm + 45 mm).
Enabling contacts
Safety-related operation must be performed by safe output con-tacts, known as enabling con-tacts. Enabling contacts are al-ways NO contacts and switch off without delay.
Signaling contacts
An NC contact is used as the signaling contact, provided that a function with relevance for safety is not performed. An en-abling contact can also be used as a signaling contact. A signal-ing contact cannot be used as an enabling contact.
Delayed enabling contacts
Machine drives that overrun for a long time must be externally braked in the event of danger. For this purpose, the power sup-ply for electrical braking can be maintained (Stop Category 1 acc. to EN 60 204-1).
3TK28 basic units have off-delay enabling contacts in addition to instantaneous enabling con-tacts. Time delays of between 0.5 and 300 s are available with the different versions. A 3RP19 02 sealable covering cap (see Selection and Ordering Data, Accessories) can be fitted to protect against unauthorized adjustment of the set delay time.
Expansion units
If the number of enabling con-tacts of the basic unit are inade-quate, expansion units can be used. Expansion units provide either 4 (relay) or 7 (solid state) enabling contacts depending on the version selected. Up to six 3TK2830 relay expansion units can be connected to one 3TK282 safety relay base unit or one 3TK283 press control unit. Also, up to six 3TK2856 or 3TK2857 solid state expansion units can be connected to one 3TK284 solid state safety relay base unit or one 3TK285 solid state with contactor relay base unit.
Expansion units are not allowed to be operated separately in safety-related switching circuits; they must be combined with a basic unit. An enabling contact of the basic unit is required for connecting an expansion unit. The category of a control system with expansion unit corresponds to that of the basic unit.
Solid-state safety relays
The European foreword of EN 60204-1, Edition 11/98 per-mits safe solid-state solutions for safety tasks in addition to the generally applicable switching elements with contacts. This is conditional on the resulting de-gree of safety being as high as that met by the devices using contacts. The solid-state safety relays comply with Categories up to 4 according to EN 954-1 and SIL 3 (Safety Integrity Level) according to IEC 61508.
Description of functions
For internal circuit diagrams, see page 13/23.• The internal circuit is con-
structed with redundancy and diversity. The processors mon-itor each other dynamically.
• The output drivers are also re-dundant and diverse and are monitored by a cyclic self-test.
• All sensor signals are dynami-cally tested, so faults can be detected on the sensors, wires (crossovers), etc.
• The field-effect transistor (FET) is activated by both proces-sors. The output driver must be activated simultaneously by one of the two processors. Only then is the voltage con-nected safely from power sup-ply terminal A1 to output termi-nals 14 + 24.
• All solid-state switches (FET + output driver) are dynamically monitored by the processors.
• The required functionality (1-channel or 2-channel), moni-tored start or autostart, EMER-GENCY-STOP, protective door and cascading is set by means of bridges at the connection terminals.
Solid-state safety relays with floating, positively-driven enable contacts
With these devices, solid-state safety combinations are con-nected with contactor relays. The combination is supplied as a complete self-contained unit, fully wired and tested for snap-ping onto a standard rail. This unit combines the advantages of a solid-state safety combination and those of contactor relays with positively-driven contacts in a single device. Approvals and certificates have been awarded by the appropriate authorities.
Installation
For snap-on mounting on a stan-dard mounting rail acc. to EN 50 022. Screw mounting is also possible for the devices by means of 2 additional 3RP19 03 plug-in tabs.
Application manual
If you would like more informa-tion, please request the applica-tion manual "Safety Integrated: The Safety System for the Indus-tries of the World". Important in-formation on safety standards and regulations is provided here. You can select the right systems and products for use in modern safety installations from the complete, totally integrated safety concept "Safety Inte-grated", ranging from• Safety Integrated (command
devices and signalling de-vices, electromagnetic switches, light beams, laser scanners, safety combina-tions, safe load feeders, dis-tributed load feeders, AS-i Safety at Work),
• The fail-safe SIMATIC PLC• SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
or SIMODRIVEthrough to• Applications• Typical circuit diagrams, fail-
safe communication via stan-dard field buses.
06IC13_013-018.qxd 11/3/05 10:55 AM Page 13/17
13/18
Overview
The safety pilot for safety relays with contacts guides you quickly to the right device
Type 1-channel connection
2-channel connection
Crossover protection
Category acc. to EN 954-1 4)
EMER-GENCY-STOP
Protective door
Enablingcontacts
Signal.contacts
Autostart Monitored start
B 1 2 3 4
Basic units3TK28 21 6) – 3 NO 1 NC –3TK28 22 – 1) 2 NO – –3TK28 23 – 2 NO – –3TK28 24 6) – 2 NO – –3TK28 25 3 NO 2 NC3TK28 27 }
2) 2 NO + 2 NO, delayed
1 NC –
3TK28 28 }2) 2 NO +
2 NO, delayed
1 NC –
Expansion units 3)3TK28 30 – – – – – 4 NO – – –
Press control units 5)3TK28 34 – – – 2 NO +
2 NC– – –
3TK28 35 – – – – – 3 NO + 1 NC
– – –
= available} = available, at additional cost– = not available
1) The ON button is not monitored.2) Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts.3) The category acc. to EN 954-1 is identical to that of the basic unit.4) The maximum achievable category acc. to EN 954-1 is dependent on the
external connection, the choice of sensors and the physical arrangement on the machine. Compliance with the standards and regulations for safety at the machine is essential.
5) The overtravel test unit can only be used in conjunction with the two-hand control unit.
6) These devices support attainment of category 3 in accordance with DIN EN 954-1. Depending on the hazardous assessment, additional measures in the sensor circuit (e.g. protected routing) may be required.
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/129
06IC13_013-018.qxd 2/20/06 6:43 PM Page 13/18
13/19
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/132
Technical data
Type 3TK28 21 3TK28 22 3TK28 23 3TK28 24 3TK28 30 3TK28 25 3TK28 27, 3TK28 34 3TK28 353TK28 28
Specifications EN 60 204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN 954-1, EN ISO 12100 Also EN 574
Test certificates BG, SUVA, UL, CSA
Category acc. to EN 954-1,resp. EN 574
2–
4–
4–
2–
as basic unit
4–
4 2)–
4,type III C
as basic unit
Mechanical endurance 10 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance at Ie 100 000 operating cycles
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 300Pollution degree 3Overvoltage category acc. to DIN VDE 0110 III
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4
Permissible ambient temperature• in operation °C –25 to +60 (suitable for butt-mounting; 70 °C possible with restrictions)• when stored °C –40 to +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60 529 IP 40 enclosure, IP 20 terminals IP 20 enclosure & terminals
Shock hazard protection acc. to VDE 0106 safe from touch
Rated powerDC-/AC operation at 1.0 × Us W 1.5 3 4 3
Operating range• AC operation 0.85 to 1.1 × Us 0.85 to 1.1 × Us• DC operation 0.85 to 1.2 ×Us 0.85 to 1.1 × Us
Operating frequency 1000/h at current IeShock resistance, semi-sinus. to IEC 60 068 8 g/10 ms
Short-circuit protection(weld-free protection at Ik = 1 kA) 4) Fusible links NH Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE: 6 A
Operational class gL/gG 6 A (slow), quick 10 A3)
Rated operational currentacc. to IEC 60 947
• conventional free-air thermal current Ith A 5 6 5 6 5
• Ie / AC-15 at 115 V A 5 6 5 /2 5) 6 5 /2 6)at 230 V A 5 6 5 /2 5) 6 5 /2 6)
• Ie / DC-13 at 24 V A 5 6 5 /2 5) 6 5 /2 6)
Conventional thermal current Ithwith 2 to 4 enabling contacts
• at UT 70 °C A 5 A 4 A 5 A 4 A• at UT 60 °C A 6 A 5 A 6 A 5 A• at UT 50 °C A 6 A 5 A 6 A 5 A
Response time ms 309) 100 50
• monitored start ms – – 30 – – 25 80 – –• autostart ms 200 7) 100 – 200 7) 8) – 150 80 – –
Release time ms 20 50
• for EMERGENCY-STOP ms 200 80 20 200 – 25 25 – –• for supply failure ms 200 100 150 200 2510) 350 100 – –
Recovery time 250 250
• for EMERGENCY-STOP ms 200 200 400 200 – 200 after delay – –• for supply failure ms 200 200 600 200 100 500 1 s – –
Bridging of supply failures ms 60 30 80 60 35 100 30 40 40
Minimum command duration
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 200 25 25 200 8) – 25 25 – –• ON button ms 150 40 25 150 8) – 25 25 – –
Simultaneity ms 500
Conductor cross-sections
Screw terminals
• finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5), 1 x (0.5 to 2.5)• solid mm2 2 × (0.5 to 2.5), 1 × (0.5 to 4)
• tightening torque, M 3.5 screw Nm 0.8 to 1.2
Spring loaded (1 or 2 wires)
• solid mm2 2 × (0.25 to 1.5)• finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 to 1.0)• finely stranded without end-sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 to 1.5)
• AWG wires, solid or stranded 2 × AWG 24 to 16
Permissible mounting position any
2 3 4
4 A 3,5 A 3 A4,5 A 4 A 3,5 A5 A 4,5 A 4 A
1) Possible if external measures are implemented. This information is applicable provided that the wires and sensors are reliably connected and mechanically protected. See operating instructions and applications manual.
2) Only applicable to the instantaneous enabling contacts; category 3 applies for time-delay enabling contacts.
3) Signalling circuit for 3TK28 21 = 6 A.4) Other fuses on request.5) Instantaneous/time-delay enabling contacts.
6) 2 A applied to enabl. cont. 13/14.7) With AC 24 V: 300 ms.8) With AC 115 V, 230 V: 300 ms.9) With AC 115, 230 V: 200 ms.10) With AC 115, 230 V: 80 ms.
06IC13_019-024.qxd 11/8/05 6:40 PM Page 13/19
SiemIndus
13/20
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Relays
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/130
Selection and ordering data
Rated control supply voltages US DC 24 V and AC 50/60 Hz, 24, 115, 230 V
Enabling contacts
Signal.contacts
Achievable category
Rated control supplyvoltage US
Widthmm
With screw terminals With spring loaded terminals
acc. to EN 954-1
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
Preferred type 1 unit kg Preferred type 1 unit kg
Basic units for EMERGENCY-STOP and protective doors2)
3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, screw terminals
Autostart
3 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2 3) AC/DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 21-1CB30 159.00 0.276 3TK28 21-2CB30 166.00 0.246
2 NO – B, 1, 2, 3, 4 AC/DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 22-1CB30 163.00 0.271 3TK28 22-2CB30 170.00 0.250
Monitored start
2 NO – B, 1, 2, 3, 4 AC/DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 23-1CB30 163.00 0.271 3TK28 23-2CB30 170.00 0.247
Autostart
2 NO – B, 1, 2 3) AC/DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 24-1CB30 140.00 0.254 3TK28 24-2CB30 145.00 0.230
2 NO – B, 1, 2 3) DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 24-1BB40 131.00 0.249 3TK28 24-2BB40 138.00 0.228
2 NO – B, 1, 2 3) AC 115 V 22.5 3TK28 24-1AJ20 144.00 0.294 3TK28 24-2AJ20 151.00 0.265
2 NO – B, 1, 2 3) AC 230 V 22.5 3TK28 24-1AL20 144.00 0.288 3TK28 24-2AL20 151.00 0.270
3TK28 25, screw terminals
Autostart/monitored start
3 NO 2 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 DC 24 V 45 3TK28 25-1BB40 232.00 0.423 3TK28 25-2BB40 239.00 0.374
3 NO 2 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 AC 24 V 45 3TK28 25-1AB20 232.00 0.421 3TK28 25-2AB20 239.00 0.375
3 NO 2 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 AC 115 V 45 3TK28 25-1AJ20 232.00 0.519 3TK28 25-2AJ20 239.00 0.472
3 NO 2 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 AC 230 V 45 3TK28 25-1AL20 232.00 0.516 3TK28 25-2AL20 239.00 0.475
Monitored start
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V 45 3TK28 27-1BB40 323.00 0.497 3TK28 27-2BB40 334.00 0.455
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V 45 3TK28 27-1AB20 323.00 0.496 3TK28 27-2AB20 334.00 0.454
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V 45 3TK28 27-1AJ20 334.00 0.650 3TK28 27-2AJ20 345.00 0.606
3TK28 27 and 3TK28 28, screw terminals
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V 45 3TK28 27-1AL20 334.00 0.650 3TK28 27-2AL20 345.00 0.604
off-delay, tv 0.5 - 30 s
Monitored start
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V 45 3TK28 27-1BB41 323.00 0.495 3TK28 27-2BB41 334.00 0.454
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V 45 3TK28 27-1AB21 323.00 0.499 3TK28 27-2AB21 334.00 0.454
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V 45 3TK28 27-1AJ21 334.00 0.650 3TK28 27-2AJ21 345.00 0.240
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V 45 3TK28 27-1AL21 334.00 0.650 3TK28 27-2AL21 345.00 0.605
off-delay, tv 0.05 - 3 s
Autostart
3TK28 21, with spring loaded terminals
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V 45 3TK28 28-1BB40 323.00 0.496 3TK28 28-2BB40 334.00 0.457
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V 45 3TK28 28-1AB20 323.00 0.500 3TK28 28-2AB20 334.00 0.468
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V 45 3TK28 28-1AJ20 334.00 0.650 3TK28 28-2AJ20 345.00 0.609
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V 45 3TK28 28-1AL20 334.00 0.650 3TK28 28-2AL20 345.00 0.612
off-delay, tv 0.5 - 30 s
Autostart
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) DC 24 V 45 3TK28 28-1BB41 323.00 0.499 3TK28 28-2BB41 334.00 0.450
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 24 V 45 3TK28 28-1AB21 323.00 0.501 3TK28 28-2AB21 334.00 0.545
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 115 V 45 3TK28 28-1AJ21 334.00 0.657 3TK28 28-2AJ21 345.00 0.240
2 NO + 2 NO 1 NC B, 1, 2, 3, 4 1) AC 230 V 45 3TK28 28-1AL21 334.00 0.650 3TK28 28-2AL21 345.00 0.608
off-delay, tv 0.05 - 3 s
1) Only applicable to the instantaneous enabling contacts.2) For dimension drawings see page 13/22.
3) These devices support attainment of category 3 in accordance with DIN EN 954-1. Depending on the hazardous assessment, additional measures in the sensor circuit (e.g. protected routing) may be required.
06IC13_019-024.qxd 2/18/06 1:37 PM Page 13/20
13/21
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Relays
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/131
Selection and ordering data
Rated control supply voltages US DC 24 V and AC 50/60 Hz, 24, 115, 230 V
Accessories
Enablingcontacts 1)
Signal.contacts
Achievablecategory 2)
Ratedcontrol supplyvoltage US
Widthmm
With screw terminals With spring loaded terminals
acc. to EN 954-1
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
Preferred type 1 unit kg Preferred type 1 unit kg
Expansion units 5)
3TK28 30 To increase the number of contacts of the safety relays
(for connecting to the basic unit, 1 enabling contact of the basic unit is required for connection)4 NO4 NO4 NO
– 3)– 3)– 3)
as basic unitas basic unitas basic unit
AC/DC 24 VAC 115 VAC 230 V
22.522.522.5
3TK28 30-1CB30
3TK28 30-1AJ20
3TK28 30-1AL20
175.00
175.00
175.00
0.2670.3060.306
3TK28 30-2CB30
3TK28 30-2AJ20
3TK28 30-2AL20
182.00
182.00
182.00
0.2440.2760.276
Press control units 5)
3TK28 34, 3TK28 35, screw terminal
For use in presses and stamping machines
Two-hand control unit, two-channel2 NO 2 NC 4 DC 24 V 45 3TK28 34-1BB40 364.00 0.432 3TK28 34-2BB40 375.00 0.3832 NO 2 NC 4 AC 24 V 45 3TK28 34-1AB20 364.00 0.424 3TK28 34-2AB20 375.00 0.3762 NO 2 NC 4 AC 115 V 45 3TK28 34-1AJ20 364.00 0.519 3TK28 34-2AJ20 375.00 0.4722 NO 2 NC 4 AC 230 V 45 3TK28 34-1AL20 364.00 0.519 3TK28 34-2AL20 375.00 0.472Overtravel test unit 4)3 NO 1 NC 4 DC 24 V 45 3TK28 35-1BB40 431.00 0.495 3TK28 35-2BB40 442.00 0.4543 NO 1 NC 4 AC 24 V 45 3TK28 35-1AB20 431.00 0.476 3TK28 35-2AB20 442.00 0.4543 NO 1 NC 4 AC 115 V 45 3TK28 35-1AJ20 431.00 0.572 3TK28 35-2AJ20 442.00 0.051
Order No. List Price $ Weightapprox.
Packing
Preferred type 1 packing kgSealable cap
to secure against unauthorized adjustment, for 3TK28 27 and 3TK28 28 devices
3RP19 02 18.00 0.004 5 units
Push-in lugs for screw mounting
for 3TK28 21 to 3TK28 57 (1 set = 2 units)3RP19 03 1.40 0.002 5 sets
1) Enabling contacts are contacts of relevance to safety, which can also be used for signalling purposes.
2) The maximum achievable category acc. to EN 954-1 is the category of the basic unit. The category also depends on the external circuit, the command device selected and their location on the machine. Compliance with the standards and regulations for safety at the machine is essential.
3) Return circuit with NC contact 51 + 52.4) The 3TK28 35 overtravel test unit can only be used in conjunction with the
3TK28 34 two-hand control unit.5) For dimension drawings see page 13/22.6) Discount Code:SIRIUS Relays & Timers.
6)
6)
06IC13_019-024.qxd 2/18/06 1:37 PM Page 13/21
SiemIndus
13/22
Dimension drawings 1)
3TK28 safety relays with screw terminals3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30 3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
3TK28 safety relays with Spring Loaded terminals3TK28 21 to 3TK28 24, 3TK28 30 3TK28 25, 3TK28 27, 3TK28 28, 3TK28 34, 3TK28 35
1) For 35 mm standard rail acc. to EN 50 022. 2) Dimension for screw mounting. Screw mounting with 2 plug-in tabs 3RP19 03 per 3TK28 unit.
2)
2)
2)
3TK28 safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/137
06IC13_019-024.qxd 11/8/05 6:43 PM Page 13/22
13/23
3TK28 solid-state safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/133
Overview
The SIGUARD safety pilot for solid-state device variants guides you quickly to the right device
–
= available– = not available
= corresponds to basic unit
1) at U = 230 V.
2) at U = 24 V.
3) The outputs are only safe in con-junction with an external contac-tor.
4) An enabling circuit can be used as a signalling circuit.
Circuit diagram
Type Conductor Autostart Monitored start
EMER-GENCY-STOP
Protective door
Solid-statesensors
Cascadeinput
Safety mat Category acc. to EN 954-1
4321BV 42 CDlennahc-2lennahc-13TK28 40 – – – –3TK28 41 13TK28 42 13TK28 45 1
3TK28 50 – – – –3TK28 51 – – – –3TK28 52 – – – –3TK28 53 13TK28 56 – – – – – – – 1 –3TK28 57 – – – – – – – 1 –
Type Enabling circuit, floating
Enabling circuit, solid-state
Signal.circuit 4)
Mak./break. cap. Rated operational voltage Rated control supply voltage
Control inputs
Stopcateg. 0
Stopcateg. 1
Stopcateg. 0
Stop categ. 1
AC-15 1) DC-13 2) DC 24 V
AC230 V
AC600 V
DC24 V
AC115 V
AC230 V
DC24 V
3TK28 40 – – 2 3) – – – 0.5 A – – – – –3TK28 41 – – 2 – – – 1.5 A – – – – –3TK28 42 – – 1 1 – – 1.5 A – – – – –3TK28 45 1 1 1 1 – 2 A 1.5 A – – – –
3TK28 50 3 – – – – 6 A 10 A –3TK28 51 2 – – – 1 NC 6 A 10 A –3TK28 52 6 – – – 1 NC 6 A 10 A –3TK28 53 3 – 1 – – 6 A 10 A – – 13TK28 56 6 – 1 – 1 NC 6 A 10 A – – 13TK28 57 – 3 1 – – 6 A 10 A – – 1
Y11 Y12 Y35 Y21 Y22 Y32 Y34 A1
42412A
µC1 µC2
FET
NS
C 0
0606
1
Output driver
06IC13_019-024.qxd 2/18/06 1:38 PM Page 13/23
13/24
Technical data
1) 1 enabling contact, instanta-neous, floating, up to 230 V, 1.5 A. 1 enabling contact, instantaneous DC 24 V, 1.5 A, source output. 1 enabling contact, delayed, float-ing, up to 230 V, 1.5 A. 1 enabling contact, delayed DC 24 V, 1.5 A, source-sink output.
2) For relay outputs, use a fuse link: NH Type 3NA, DIAZED Type 5SB, NEOZED Type 5SE: 6 A (weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA).
3) When the cascading input is sup-plied from A1, the maximum re-sponse time is applicable to an external EMERGENCY STOP.
4) The drivers are not supplied, inter-nal supply bridging only. SELV/PELV power section buffered.
5) Response time 20 ms also for ex-ternal EMERGENCY STOP (cas-cading input).
6) Electrical equipment for furnaces. Certificate acc. to VDE 0116 for 3TK28 41 and 3TK28 42 only.
7) For instaneous output.
Type 3TK28 40 3TK28 41 3TK28 42 3TK28 45 1)
Specifications EN 60 204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1) EN 954-1, IEC 61 508, VDE 0116 6), EN ISO 12100
Category acc. to EN 954-1 3 4 4 4
Test certificates TÜV, UL, CSA
Electrical endurance unlimited, due to solid-state switching
Rated insulation voltage UiVtiucric lortnoc rof• 50 50 50 50Vstuptuo rof• 50 50 50 50 / 300
Rated impulse withstand voltage UimpVtiucric lortnoc rof• 500 500 500 500Vstuptuo rof• 500 500 500 500 / 2000
Permissible ambient temperatureC°noitarepo ni• –25 to +60C°derots nehw• –40 to +80
Degree of protection to EN 60 259 IP 40 enclosure, IP 20 terminals
Shock hazard protection to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 safe from touch
Operating range• AC operation –• DC operation 0.9 to 1.15 × Us
Operating frequency zin operating cycles/h at rated operation 1/h 3000
Shock resistance• Sinewave g/ms 8/10 and 15/5
Short-circuit protection(weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA)
Short-circuit current resistant Short-circuit current resistant 2)
Rated operational currentacc. to IEC 60 947-5-1
• Ie AV 511 ta51-CA/ – – – 2
at 230 V A – – – –
• Ie AV 42 ta31-CD/ 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Response time
smtrats derotinoM• 125 60 60 60smtratsotuA• 250 60 60 60
Release time
smPOTS-YCNEGREME rof• 30 45 45 7) / 0.5 to 300 s 45 7) /0.05 to 30 ssmeruliaf ylppus rof• 25 100 3) 100 3) 100
Recovery time
smPOTS-YCNEGREME rof• 20 400 400 400seruliaf ylppus rof• 0.02 max. 7 max. 7 max. 7
Bridging of supply failures ms 25 4) 25 3) 4) 25 3) 4) 25 4)
Minimum command duration
smPOTS-YCNEGREME• 20 25 30 30smnottub NO• 0.02 0.2 to 5 0.2 to 5 0.2 to 5
Simultaneity ms ∞Conductor cross-sections
Screw terminals
• finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 to 1.5), 1 x (0.5 to 2.5)mmdilos• 2 2 × (0.5 to 2.5), 1 × (0.5 to 4)
• tightening torque Nm 0.8 to 1.2
Spring loaded terminals (1 or 2 wires)
mmdilos• 2 2 × (0.25 to 1.5)• finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 to 1.0)• finely stranded without end-sleeve mm2 2 × (0.25 to 1.5)
• AWG wires, solid or stranded 2 × AWG 24 to 16
Permissible mounting position any
3TK28 solid-state safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/135
06IC13_019-024.qxd 11/29/05 8:20 AM Page 13/24
13/25
Technical data
1) Enabling contact, instantaneous DC 24 V, 1.5 A, source output.
2) Category as for basic unit.
3) For instantaneous output.
Type 3TK28 50 3TK28 51 3TK28 52 3TK28 53 1) 3TK28 56 1) 3TK28 57 1)
Specifications EN 60 204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1), EN 954-1, IEC 61 508. EN ISO 61508
Category acc. to EN 954-1 3 3 3 4 2) 2)
Test certificates TÜV, UL, CSA
Mechanical endurance 30 million operating cycles
Electrical endurance See 3RH1 characteristic curve
Rated insulation voltage Ui• for control circuit V 50• for output contacts V 690• at pollution degree 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• for control circuit V 50• for output contacts V 6000
Permissible ambient temperature• in operation °C –25 to +60• when stored °C –40 to +80
Degree of protection to EN 60 259 IP 40 enclosure, IP 20 terminals
Shock hazard protection to DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 safe from touch
Coil voltage tolerance• AC operation 0.85 to 1.1 x Us• DC operation 0.9 to 1.15 x Us
Coil ratings• AC/DC operation at Us W 8,5
Operating frequency zin operating cycles/h at rated operation 1/h 1000
Shock resistance• sinewave g/ms 8/10 and 15/5
Short-circuit protection(weld-free protection at IK = 1 kA)
See 3RH1 Contactor relay, technical specifications
Rated operational currentacc. to IEC 60 947-5-1
• Ie / AC-15 at 230 V A 6
• Ie / DC-13 at 24 V A 10 (auxiliary switch blocks: 6)
Response time
• monitored start ms 200 200 200 60 – –• autostart ms 300 300 300 60 – –
Release time
• for EMERGENCY-STOP ms 30 30 30 50 50 503) / 0.5 to 300 s
• for supply failure ms 100 100 100 120 120 120
Recovery time
• for EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 20 20 500 500 500• for supply failure s 0.02 0.02 0.02 7 7 7
Bridging of supply failures ms 5 5 5 5 5 5
Minimum command duration
• EMERGENCY-STOP ms 20 20 20 30 – –• ON button ms 20 20 20 0.2 to 5 s – –
Simultaneity ∞Conductor cross-sections
Screw terminals
• finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 to 1), 1 x (0.25 to 2.5)• solid mm2 2 x (0.2 to 1), 1 x (0.2 to 2.5)
• tightening torque Nm 0.5 to 0.6
Spring loaded terminals (1 or 2 wires)
• solid mm2 1 x (0.2 to 2.5)• finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.25 to 2.5)• finely stranded without end-sleeve mm2 1 x (0.25 to 2.5)
• AWG wires, solid or stranded 2 x AWG 24 to 12
Permissible mounting position any
3TK28 solid-state safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/136
06IC13_025-030.qxd 11/29/05 11:09 AM Page 13/25
13/26
Selection and ordering data
Rated control supply voltages US DC 24 V and AC 50/60 Hz, 24, 115, 230 V
1) The outputs are only safe in con-junction with external actuators with positively-driven contacts.
2) An enabling circuit can be used as a signaling circuit.
3) Suitable for electronic sensor input.
4) tv = off-delay, A = 0.05 to 3 s B = 0.5 to 30 sC = 5 to 300 s
5) For dimension drawings see page 13/27 and 13/28.
Enabling circuit, floating
Enabling circuit, solid-state
Signal. circuit
Achievable category acc. to EN 954-1
Rated control supply voltage US
Widthmm
With screw terminals With spring loaded terminals
Stopcate-gory 0
Stopcate-gory 1
Stopcate-gory 0
Stopcate-gory 1
Order No. List Price $
Weight approx. kg
Order No. List Price $
Weight approx. kg
Preferred type 1 unit Preferred type 1 unit
Safety combinations, solid-state, for EMERGENCY-STOP and protective doors
Basic device
– – 2 1) – – 3 DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 40-1BB40 99.00 0.180 3TK28 40-2BB40 104.00 0.150
Standard device
– – 2 3) – 2) 4 DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 41-1BB40 149.00 0.166 3TK28 41-2BB40 154.00 0.143
Standard device tv
– – 1 1, A 4) – 4 DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 42-1BB41 170.00 0.168 3TK28 42-2BB41 175.00 0.143– – 1 1, B 4) – 4 DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 42-1BB42 170.00 0.166 3TK28 42-2BB42 175.00 0.146– – 1 1, C 4) – 4 DC 24 V 22.5 3TK28 42-1BB44 170.00 0.166 3TK28 42-2BB44 170.00 0.149
Multifunction device
1 1 1 1, A 4) 1HL 2) 4 DC 24 V 45 3TK28 45-1BB41 339.00 0.400 3TK28 45-2BB41 344.00 0.3601 1 1 1, B 4) 1HL 2) 4 DC 24 V 45 3TK28 45-1BB42 339.00 0.400 3TK28 45-2BB42 344.00 0.3602 – 2 – 1HL 2) 4 DC 24 V 45 3TK28 45-1BB40 339.00 0.415 3TK28 45-2BB40 344.00 0.361
Safety rerlays, solid-state, with contactor relays, for EMERGENCY-STOP and protective doors
Basic unit
3 – – – – 3 DC 24 V 90 3TK28 50-1BB40 179.00 0.819 3TK28 50-2BB40 189.00 0.8203 – – – – 3 AC 115 V 90 3TK28 50-1AJ20 195.00 0.765 3TK28 50-2AJ20 205.00 0.6503 – – – – 3 AC 230 V 90 3TK28 50-1AL20 195.00 0.770 3TK28 50-2AL20 205.00 0.761
Basic unit
2 – – – 1 NC 3 DC 24 V 90 3TK28 51-1BB40 179.00 0.821 3TK28 51-2BB40 189.00 0.6502 – – – 1 NC 3 AC 115 V 90 3TK28 51-1AJ20 195.00 0.770 3TK28 51-2AJ20 205.00 0.6502 – – – 1 NC 3 AC 230 V 90 3TK28 51-1AL20 195.00 0.767 3TK28 51-2AL20 205.00 0.768
Basic unit
6 – – – 1 NC 3 DC 24 V 90 3TK28 52-1BB40 215.00 0.919 3TK28 52-2BB40 225.00 0.9356 – – – 1 NC 3 AC 230 V 90 3TK28 52-1AL20 225.00 0.870 3TK28 52-2AL20 235.00 0.878
Basic unit
3 – 1 3) – – 4 DC 24 V 90 3TK28 53-1BB40 249.00 0.714 3TK28 53-2BB40 259.00 0.705
Expansion unit
6 – 1 – 1 NC corresponds to basic unit
DC 24 V 90 3TK28 56-1BB40 249.00 0.785 3TK28 56-2BB40 259.00 0.750
Expansion unit tv
– 3, A 1 – – corresponds to basic unit
DC 24 V 90 3TK28 57-1BB41 255.00 0.682 3TK28 57-2BB41 265.00 0.650– 3, B 1 – – DC 24 V 90 3TK28 57-1BB42 255.00 0.679 3TK28 57-2BB42 265.00 0.677– 3, C 1 – – DC 24 V 90 3TK28 57-1BB44 260.00 0.650 3TK28 57-2BB44 270.00 0.650
3TK28 solid-state safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Relays SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/134
06IC13_025-030.qxd 2/21/06 11:11 AM Page 13/26
Inc.talog
13/27
Dimension drawings 1)
3TK28 solid-state safety relays with screw terminals54 82KT324 82KT3 ot 04 82KT3
3TK28 solid-state safety relays with spring loaded terminals54 82KT324 82KT3 ot 04 82KT3
3TK28 solid-state safety relays with floating, positively-driven enable contacts3TK28 50, 3TK28 51, 3TK28 53, 3TK28 57
slanimret dedaol gnirps htiWslanimret wercs htiW
1) For 35 mm standard rail acc. to EN 50 022.
3TK28 solid-state safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:9/138
06IC13_025-030.qxd 11/29/05 8:32 AM Page 13/27
13/28
Dimension drawings 1)
3TK28 solid-state safety relays with floating, positively-driven enable contacts3TK28 52, 3TK28 56With screw connections
3TK28 52, 3TK28 56With spring loaded connection
1) For 35 mm standard rail acc. to EN 50 022.
3TK28 solid-state safety relays
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSafety Relays
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/139
06IC13_025-030.qxd 11/7/05 6:05 PM Page 13/28
13/29
OverviewSafe 3RA7 starters consist of safety electronics, MSPs and two series-connected contac-tors. The combination of safety electronics, MSPs and contac-tors form a complete, fully assembled, wired and certi-fied starter with a coordination type 1 or 2. A special case is the 3RA71 .0 . starter without MSP, which is intended for sep-arate or fuse-protected mount-ing.Safe 3RA7 starters are offered for direct starting. Available actuating voltages are 230 V 50/60 Hz (category 3) and DC 24 V(category 3 and 4). Depending on external protec-tion, choice of actuating devices and their local arrangement at the machine, categories 3 or 4 can be reached. Also available in the fuse-protected load feed-ers range are expansion units with and without time delay.
Expansion units can be used only in combination with a basic unit. With the expansion units with time delay, starters of Stop category 1 can be constructed.Because the starter consists of the 3RV1 MSP and the 3RT1 contactors, accessories, such as auxiliary switches, from the SIRIUS range can be used.
MountingThe 3RA7 fused starters can be snapped onto a DIN EN 50 022-35 × 15 mounting rail.
Technical dataFor technical data of the elec-tronics, see page 13/30. The technical data for the power section (MSP and contactors) is found in section 4. For additional technical data for the individual devices, see the circuit-breaker and contactors section.Power for the electronics of the DC 24 V 3RA7 devices should be supplied by a power supply unit acc. to VDE 0106 (PELV) with protection class III.
Overload tripping timesAll 3RA7 fuseless load feeders described here are designed for normal starting, in other words for overload tripping times of less than 10 seconds. (CLASS 10). At rated-load oper-ating temperature the tripping time is shorter, depending on the particular equipment and the setting range. The exact values can be derived from the tripping characteristics of the circuit-breakers.
For further information about safety equipment an application manual is available.
Configuration
Types of coordinationDIN VDE 0660 Part 102 and IEC 60 947-4-1 make a distinc-tion between two different types of coordination (types 1 and 2). Any short-circuits that occur are cleared safely by both types of coordination. The only differ-ences concern the extent of the damage caused to the equip-ment by a short-circuit.
Type of coordination 2There must be no damage to the overload trip or to any other components after a short-circuit has been cleared. The 3RA fuseless load feeder can resume operation without needing to be renewed. At most, it is permissible to weld the contactor contacts if they can be disconnected easily without any significant defor-mation.
Cascading, expansionWith the category 4 devices, several protective devices can be easily connected (cascaded) and expanded to a hardwired safety logic circuit. For this purpose, the category 4 devices each have an electronic, protect-ed output (terminal 2) and a cascading input (termin-al 1). At terminal 1, the de-vices expect and evaluate a protected 24 V signal. If this signal is not present, the de-vice shuts down safely. The startup conditions corre-spond with those of a sensor shutdown (Emergency-Stop actuation).
Operational switchingThrough terminals 3 and 4 of the category 4 devices, opera-tional switching (On/Off) of the contactor is possible. Two methods of operational switch-ing are available. Through
a floating contact (terminals 3 and 4) or with potential (DC 24 V), for example through a PLC (terminal 4 only). Opera-tional switching is subordinate to the safety function.
Example of circuit for cascading with 3TK28 41 and 3RA7 1 (category 4 or expansion units)
3RA7up to 22 A
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedStarters with Integrated Safety
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 5/44
06IC13_025-030.qxd 11/3/05 6:20 PM Page 13/29
13/30
Technical data
Technical data of the safety electronics of the 3RA7 load feeders .For the technical data of the power section (MSP, contactors), please see the table for starters in Section 4.
Type Basic unit ACCategory 3
Basic unit DCCategory 3
Basic unit DCCategory 4
Expansion unit Expansion unittime-delayed
Specifications EN 60 204-1, EN 292, EN 954-1, IEC 61 508
Test certification TÜV, UL, CSA
Category acc. to EN 954-1 3 3 4 41) 41)
Safety Integrated Level (SIL)acc. to IEC 61 508
2 2 3 31) 31)
Rated insulation voltage 690 V
Impulse voltage withstand level 6 KV
Permissible temperaturein operation
in storage– 20 ... + 60 °C (– 4 ... + 140 °F)– 40 ... + 80 °C (– 40 ... + 176 °F)
Degree of protection IP 20
Shock-hazard protection safe from finger-touch
RatingDC/AC-actuation at 1.0 x Us 2 W2)
Operating rangeAC actuationDC actuation
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us0.9 ... 1.1 x Us
Closing timeMonitored start
Autostart125 ms typical3)250 ms typical3)
400 ms typical3)400 ms typical3)
Opening timeon Emergency-Stop
on supply failure20 ms typical4)
100 ms 25 ms typical
100 msafter time elapsed100 ms
Recovery timeon Emergency-Stop
on supply failure20 ms typical20 ms typical
400 ms typical4 s
Mains failure bridging 5 ms (see technical data of used contactors)
Minimum command timeEmergency-Stop
button> 20 ms typical> 20 ms typical
> 25 ms typical> 100 ms typical
Cable cross-sectionsflexible with ferrule
solid1 x 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
1 x 0.2 – 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque, terminal screws M3 0.5 – 0.6 Nm
1) The highest achievable category is equal to the cat-egory of the basic unit. The category also depends on the external protection, the choice of actuating devices and the local arrangement at the machine. The normative safety standards at the machine must be observed.
2) Observe power dissipation of each power section (see technical data for circuit-breakers/contac-tors).
3) Observe the pick-up delay of the contactors (see technical data for the contactors).
4) Observe the drop-out delay of the contactors (see technical data for the contactors).
3RA7up to 22 A
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedStarters with Integrated Safety
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 5/43
06IC13_025-030.qxd 2/18/06 1:39 PM Page 13/30
13/31
Selection and ordering data
Direct-in-line starting Rated control supply voltage 50/60 Hz AC 230 V for standard 35 mm rail
MSPs, contactors and protective electronics fullyprewired and certified to category 3 acc. to EN 954-1Auxiliary switches on the MSP and the contactorcan be easily fitted due to the modular system
Three-phase standard motor1)4-pole at AC 400 V
Setting range Inverse-time delayed overload release
Starters with integrated safety Size
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
Ratedpower
Motor current
P I Basic unitCategory 32)kW A A 1 unit kg
Type of coordination 2 at Iq = 50 kA at 400 V (compatible with type of coordination 1)0.04 0.16 0.11 ... 0.16 3RA71 01-0AA17-0AL2 469.00 0.82 S000.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RA71 01-0BA17-0AL2 469.00 1.440.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RA71 01-0CA17-0AL2 469.00 0.820.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RA71 01-0DA17-0AL2 469.00 1.43
0.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RA71 01-0EA17-0AL2 469.00 0.820.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RA71 01-0FA17-0AL2 483.00 0.820.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RA71 01-0GA17-0AL2 483.00 0.82
0.25 0.8 0.55 ... 0.8 3RA71 01-0HA17-0AL2 483.00 0.820.25 0.8 0.7 ... 1 3RA71 01-0JA17-0AL2 483.00 0.820.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RA71 01-0KA17-0AL2 483.00 1.48
0.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RA71 01-1AA17-0AL2 483.00 0.820.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RA71 01-1BA17-0AL2 483.00 1.47
0.75 1.9 1.8 ... 2.5 3RA71 02-1CA26-0AL2 622.00 1.20 S01.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RA71 02-1DA26-0AL2 622.00 1.861.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RA71 02-1EA26-0AL2 622.00 1.201.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RA71 02-1FA26-0AL2 622.00 1.20
2.2 5.2 4.5 ... 6.3 3RA71 02-1GA26-0AL2 622.00 1.913 6.8 5.5 ... 8 3RA71 02-1HA26-0AL2 622.00 1.944 9.0 7 ... 10 3RA71 02-1JA26-0AL2 622.00 1.20
5.5 11.5 9 ... 12.5 3RA71 02-1KA26-0AL2 651.00 1.207.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RA71 02-4AA26-0AL2 651.00 1.207.5 15.5 14 ... 20 3RA71 02-4BA26-0AL2 651.00 1.20
7.5 15.5 17 ... 22 3RA71 02-4CA26-0AL2 651.00 1.92
Contactor safety combination11 22.5 3RA71 00-5AA26-0AL2 457.00 1.13 S0
for separate surface mounting of MSPs and contactorsor surface mounting with fuse protection
1) Selection depends on the actual startup and rated data of the protected motor.
2) The highest achievable category acc. to EN 954-1 is equal to the category of the basic unit. The category also depends on the external protection, the
selection of actuating devices and the local arrange-ment at the machine. The normative safety standards at the machine must be observed.
3RA71 02 3RA71 00
Contactor safety combination
3RA7up to 22 A
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedStarters with Integrated Safety
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Relays
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 5/41
06IC13_031-036.qxd 2/18/06 1:46 PM Page 13/31
SiemIndus
13/32
Selection and ordering data
Direct-in-line starting Rated control supply voltage DC 24 Vfor standard 35 mm rail
MSPs, contactors and protective electronics fullyprewired and certified to category 4 acc. to EN 954-1Auxiliary switches on the MSP and the contactorcan be easily fitted due to the modular systemExpansion units for multiplication of starters in a safety circuit
Three-phase Setting range,thermal overloadrelease
Starters with integrated safety Sizemotor1) 4-pole,at AC 400 V
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
Rated Motorpower current Basic unit Basic unit Expansion2) Expansion, Expansion,P I
PG 101
Category 32) Category 42) time-delay time-delay0.05–3 s2) 0.5–30 s2)
kW A A 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit kg
Type of coordination 2 at Iq = 50 kA at 400 V0 1 2 3 4
0.06 0.2 0.11 ... 0.16 3RA71 @1-0AA17-0AB4 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.00 0.82 S000.06 0.2 0.14 ... 0.2 3RA71 @1-0BA17-0AB4 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.000.06 0.2 0.18 ... 0.25 3RA71 @1-0CA17-0AB4 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.000.09 0.3 0.22 ... 0.32 3RA71 @1-0DA17-0AB4 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.000.09 0.3 0.28 ... 0.4 3RA71 @1-0EA17-0AB4 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.00 521.000.12 0.4 0.35 ... 0.5 3RA71 @1-0FA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.000.18 0.6 0.45 ... 0.63 3RA71 @1-0GA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.000.25 0.8 0.55 ... 0.8 3RA71 @1-0HA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.000.25 0.8 0.7 ... 1 3RA71 @1-0JA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.000.37 1.1 0.9 ... 1.25 3RA71 @1-0KA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.000.55 1.5 1.1 ... 1.6 3RA71 @1-1AA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.000.75 1.9 1.4 ... 2 3RA71 @1-1BA17-0AB4 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00 535.00
0.75 2.7 1.8 ... 2.5 3RA71 @2-1CA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 1.2 S0
1.1 2.7 2.2 ... 3.2 3RA71 @2-1DA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.001.5 3.6 2.8 ... 4 3RA71 @2-1EA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.001.5 3.6 3.5 ... 5 3RA71 @2-1FA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.002.2 5.2 4.5 ... 6.3 3RA71 @2-1GA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.003 6.8 5.5 ... 8 3RA71 @2-1HA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.004 9.0 7 ... 10 3RA71 @2-1JA26-0AB4 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.00 680.005.5 11.5 9 ... 12.5 3RA71 @2-1KA26-0AB4 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.007.5 15.5 11 ... 16 3RA71 @2-4AA26-0AB4 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.007.5 15.5 14 ... 20 3RA71 @2-4BA26-0AB4 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.007.5 15.5 17 ... 22 3RA71 @2-4CA26-0AB4 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.00 709.00
Contactor safety combination11 22.5 3RA71 @0-5AA26-0AB4 515.00 515.00 515.00 515.00 515.00 S0
for separate mounting of circuit-breakers and contactorsor mounting with fuse protection
1) Selection depends on the actual startup and rated data of the protected motor.
2) The highest achievable category acc. to EN 954-1 is equal to the category of the basic unit. The cate-gory also depends on the external protection, the choice of actuating devices and the local arrange-ment at the machine. The normative safety stand-ards at the machine must be observed.
3RA71 01 3RA71 00
Contactor safety combination
3RA7up to 22 A
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedStarters with Integrated Safety
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 5/42
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Relays
06IC13_031-036.qxd 2/18/06 1:46 PM Page 13/32
13/33
3RA7up to 22 A
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedStarters with Integrated Safety
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 5/46
Inc.talog
Dimension drawings
Size S00 · for standard rail mounting Size S0 · for standard rail mounting
3RA71 .1-, size S00 3RA71 .2-, size S0
Size S0 · for standard rail mounting and contactor combination
3RA71 .0-, size S0
06IC13_031-036.qxd 11/29/05 8:49 AM Page 13/33
SiemIndus
13/34
Application Cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for EMER-GENCY-STOP facilities on par-ticularly endangered system sections. They are available with metal enclosures.
As the effective range of a cable-operated switch is limited by the length of the pull-wire, large sys-tems can also be protected.
Cable-operated switches (re-quiring pulling at both ends) and conveyor belt unbalance track-ers are used primarily for monitoring very long belt sys-tems.
SpecificationsSwitches with latching for imple-mentation in EMERGENCY-STOP equipment correspond to the EN 418 standard.
Principle of operationThe switch contacts of the cable-operated switches and the con-veyor belt unbalance protection devices are positive opening.
Cable-operated switches with one-side operation are held in free position by the pre-tension force on the turnbuckle.
• In the 3SE7 140, -150 and -160 cable-operated switches, both switching contacts are avail-able for cable-break/cable pull signaling. The NO contact is used, for example, for signal-ing purposes.
For switches with latching, with a pretensioned cable, the locking must be deactivated beforehand in order to return the switch to its free position.
Technical data
Travel diagrams
Type 3SE7 120 3SE7 150 3SE7 140 3SE7 141 3SE7 160 3SE7 310Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200); IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1); EN 418 (ISO 13850)
Certifications UL / CSA
Electrical design Contacts electrically isolated from each other
Electrical loading• at AC-15 AC 400 V, 6A AC 250 V, 2A AC 400 V, 6A
• minimum AC/DC 24 V, 10 mA
Short circuit protection 6 A (Slow acting)
Mechanical endurance > 1 x 106 operating cycles
Contact material Fine silver
Actuation By pulling or breaking of a rope (cable)
Rope length, maximum Spacing between rope supports, maximum
10 m
3 m
25 m
3 m
50 m
5 m
75 m 1)
5 m
2 x 50 m
5 m
–
–
Enclosure GD alloy, coated (color), dark black RAL 9005
Cover Shock-resistant thermoplastic
Degree of protectionacc. To IEC 60529 IP65 IP66 1P65
Ambient temperature -25C to +70C
Mounting Designed for M 5
Mounting space 30 mm and 40 mm
Cable entry 2x(M20x1.5)2x(M25x1.5)
2x(M20x1.5) 1x(M16x1.5) 3x(M20x1.5) 2x(M25x1.5)
Type of connection M3.5 screw connection; Self-lifting pressure plate terminals
00F.1-041 7ES3.0D.1-041 7ES310DD2-021 7ES3 3SE7 141-1EG10
noitisop lartneCnoitisop lartneCnoitisop tseRnoitisop lartneC
EA1-013 7ES3 ,EA1-061 7ES300FB1-051 7ES3 ,00FB1-021 7ES3.0D..-051 7ES3
noitisop lartneCnoitisop lartneCnoitisop lartneC
13222114
NSC0_006 45
1) 75 m cable length possible provided the ambient temperature range is strictly observed, otherwise, 50 m.
3SE7 1.0 / 3SE7 310Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedCable-Operated Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/75
06IC13_031-036.qxd 2/21/06 12:26 PM Page 13/34
Cable-Operated Switches
13/35
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · With one-side actuation · Degree of protection IP 65 · Latching according to EN 418 2)
for cable lengths 1)
Maximumspacing between the cablesupports
Design Contacts(NO as signalling contact)
Order No. ListPrice $
Weight approx.
m m 1 unit kg
Cable-operated switches 2)3SE7 120-1BF00 10 3 Metal enclosure
(cover made of molded plastic) • Without latching, only cable pull
monitoringM25 x 1.5 Conduit
1 NO + 1 NC 3SE7 120-2DD01 152.00 0.395
• With latching and button resetM20 x 1.5 Conduit
2 NC 3SE7 120-1BF00 198.00 0.410
3SE7 150-1BD00 25 3 Metal enclosure with M 20 conduit(cover made of molded plastic) with dust protection and alignment window• Without latching
• with LED, RED, 24 VDC1 NO + 1 NC1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7 150-2DD00
3SE7 150-2DD04 5)
152.00
236.000.4250.425
• With latching and button reset 1 NO + 1 NC2 NC
3SE7 150-1BD00
3SE7 150-1BF00
195.00
195.00
0.4450.440
• with LED, RED, 24 VDC 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE7 150-1BD04 5) 278.00 0.450
• with latching and key reset 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE7 150-1CD00 214.00 0.5103SE7 141-1EG10 75 6) 5 Metal enclosure with M 20 conduit
(cover made of molded plastic)
• with EMERGENCY STOP andLockout release
1 NO + 3 NC 3SE7 141-1EG10 245.00 0.790
3SE7 140-1B.00 50 5 Metal enclosure with M 16 conduit(cover made of molded plastic)with dust protection• With latching and button reset 1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC3SE7 140-1BD00
3SE7 140-1BF00
457.00
457.00
0.7920.790
• with LED, RED, 24 VDC 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE7 140-1BD04 510.00 0.820• with latching and key unlatching 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE7 140-1CD00 550.00 0.835
3SE7 160-1AE00 2 × 50 5 Metal enclosure with M 25 conduitwith two-direction actuation, latching andbutton reset
• with LED, RED, 24 VDC
2 NO + 2 NC1 NO + 1 NC2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7 160-1AE00
3SE7 160-1BD00
3SE7 160-1AE04
488.00
419.00
535.00
1.2700.3001.200
Conveyor belt unbalance protection device3SE7 310-1AE00 Metal enclosure with M25 conduit
with latching and pressure unlatching
• with LED, RED, 24 VDC
2 NO + 2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7 310-1AE00
3SE7 310-1AE04
612.00
658.00
1.805
1.815
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) These cable lengths can be used with max. temperature deviationsof ±15°. 75 m cable length possible probided the ambient temperature range is strictly observed, otherwise, 50 m.
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.3) LED, RED, 24 VDC with M 20 x 1.5 thread and 25 mm dia. lens.
4) See page 13/68 for switch with AS-Interface connection.5) Alignment window not included.
6) 75 m rope length possible provided the ambient temperature range is strictly observed, otherwise 50 m max.
3)
3)
4)
3)
3)
4)
4)
3SE7 1.0 / 3SE7 310Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/76
06IC13_031-036.qxd 2/20/06 6:42 PM Page 13/35
13/36
Accessories
Description Length / diameter Order No. ListPrice $
Weight approx.
Steel ropes1) kg
• ∅ 4 mm 10 m 3SE7 910-3AA 68.00 0.420
15 m 3SE7 910-3AB 102.00 0.665
20 m 3SE7 910-3AC 135.00 0.865
50 m 3SE7 910-3AH 336.00 2.065
Rope clamps
• Oval ∅ 4 mm 3SE7 941-1AC 13.00 0.040
• Simplex(1 set = 4 units)
∅ 4 mm 3SE7 943-1AC 17.00 0.010
• Duplex (1 set = 4 units)
∅ 4 mm 3SE7 944-1AC 25.00 0.020
• Single (1 set = 4 units)
∅ 5 mm 3SE7 942-1AA 10.00 0.025
Tension springs (zinc-plated) to maintain the counter-tension
• 13 N 3SE7 931-1AB 20.00 0.150
• 35 N 3SE7 931-1AD 30.00 0.340
Rope rollers for changing the direction of the rope, rotatable
• ∅ 4 mm 3SE7 921-1AC 16.00 0.045
Fixing of the rope roller 3SE7 921-1AA 4.00 0.015
Rope eyes for changes in rope direction and improved power transmission at the fixing points (1 set = 4 units)
• ∅ 4 mm 3SE7 930-1AD 9.00 0.005
Eyebolts for fixing the rope
• incl. nut M 8 3SE7 920-1AB 10.00 0.035
• incl. nut M 10 3SE7 920-1AC 10.00 0.060
Turnbuckle for precise adjustment of the pretension
• M 6 × 60 3SE7 950-1AB 15.00 0.055
• M 6 × 110 3SE7 950-1AD 41.00 0.075
1) Diameter including casing; the diameter of the steel wire is 3.2 mm.
3SE7Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedCable-Operated Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/77
06IC13_031-036.qxd 11/29/05 8:58 AM Page 13/36
13/37
3SE7 1.0 / 3SE7 310Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedCable-Operated Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/79
Dimension drawings
Metal enclosure3SE7 120-2DD.., 3SE7 150-2DD..without latching
3SE7 120-1B..., 3SE7 150-1B...with latching and button reset
Metal enclosure3SE7 140-1B...with latching and button reset
3SE7 140-1CD.with latching and key reset
Metal enclosure3SE7 150-1CD..with latching and key reset
3SE 7141-1EG10.with EMERGENCY STOP and Lockout release
3SE7 160-1AE..with latching and button reset
3SE7 310-1AE.. conveyor belt unbalance protection devicewith latching and button reset
06IC13_037-042.qxd 1/25/06 9:49 AM Page 13/37
SiemIndus
13/38
Construction
Long lengths of rope up to 50 m 2)
Pulling from both sides up to 2 x 50 m 2)
Actuation forces and distances:
Rope releases Rope pulled
Type Tencing force (at middle point)
Force at operating position
Distance to operating position2)
Force at operating position
Distance to operating position2)
3SE7 150-1CD. , 232 (N) 130 (N) 3 mm 312 (N) 3 mm
3SE7 150-2DD. . 217 (N) 120 (N) 3 mm 311 (N) 3 mm
3SE7 150-1BD. . 210 (N) 133 (N) 2 mm 270 (N) 2 mm
3SE7 140-1CD. . 400 (N) 200 (N) 2.5 mm 550 (N) 3 mm
3SE7 150-1BD. . 400 (N) 250 (N) 3 mm 570 (N) 3 mm 2) 0-Basis at mid-position
Assembly note:
Rope eye ø 43SE7 930-1AD
Rope roller, fixed3SE7 921-1AC
Tension spring 1)35 N3SE7 931-1AD
Tension spring 1)35 N3SE7 931-1AD
Rope rollers, fixed3SE7 921-1AC
EyeboltM 103SE7 920-1AC
Ropeclamp,simplex4 mm,oval4 mm
SIGUARDcable-operatedswitch3SE7 160
Ropeclamp,simplex4 mm,oval4 mm
Ropeclamp,simplex4 mm,oval4 mm
Rope eye ø 43SE7 930-1AD
Rope roller, fixed3SE7 921-1AC
NS
C0
0049
9aTurnbuckleM 6 x 603SE7 950-1AB
Ropeclamp,simplex4 mm,oval4 mm
Ropeclamp,simplex4 mm,oval4 mm
Rope eye ø 43SE7 930-1AD
1) Use of a tension spring is essential for long sections of rope.2) See page 13/35 for maximum spacing between cable supports.3) For Medium lengths of rope, less than 25 m, Eyebolt M8, Order No. 3SE7 920-1AB, can be used.
p3SE7 910
Recommended rope length with Emergency-STOP rope pull switches depending on ambient temperature ranges.
3SE7 1.0 / 3SE7 310Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedCable-Operated Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/78, 9/80
06IC13_037-042.qxd 11/1/05 7:19 PM Page 13/38
13/39
3SE7 1.0 / 3SE7 310Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedCable-Operated Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/81
Application: Conveyor belt monitoring
Rope Pull Switches might be used as Emergency-STOP devices to cover a continuous distance for immediate shut-off instead of using common E-STOP pushbutton devices.SIGUARD rope pull switches with latching meet the requirements according to EN418 and provide NC contacts with direct opening action. Rope pull switches without latching can only be used as normal stop devices.
SIGUARD Rope Pull switches• trip due to a pulled and a bro-
ken rope• are equipped with a manual re-
set to close NC contacts after retensing the rope
• can be mounted in any direc-tion
• cover different rope lengths up to 50m
• support a whole range of ac-cessories and mounting equip-ment
• shall be used with the offered steel rope with red plastic coat-ing
06IC13_037-042.qxd 10/25/05 3:04 PM Page 13/39
SiemIndus
13/40
3SE2 / SE3 Molded plastic /metal enclosure with separate actuator
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/57
ApplicationSafety interlock switches with separate actuator are used where the position of doors, cov-ers or safety screens must be
monitored for safety reasons. For example, they can be used together with 3TK28 safety re-lays up to safety category 4.
ConstructionInterlock switches with separate actuator are available in three versions.• Molded plastic enclosure with
mounting dimensions accord-ing to EN 50 047
• Metal enclosure with mounting dimensions according to EN 50 041
• Molded plastic enclosure out-side of the standards that have arisen in this form in accor-dance with general market re-quirements.
When used as a safety switch mounting at a spacing of 20 mm (molded plastic housings) or 30 mm (metal housing) is neces-sary. Or, the interlock switch must be fitted with a pin or stop.
OperationInterlock switches with separate actuator can only be operated with a matching triple-coded ac-tuator. Actuation by hand or with auxiliary devices is virtually im-possible.The actuators are not included with the interlock switch and must be ordered separately.
Side operating heads can be ro-tated in 90° increments and can-not be replaced with actuators of the standard type.Operating heads for the 3SE2 243 and 3SE2 257 types cannot be changed.
Radius actuatorInterlock switches with radius actuators are particularly suit-able for rotatable protection de-vices. The movable actuation key allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is pre-vented.
Contact reliabilityThe movable contacts of the 3SE2 120, 3SE3 170 and 3SE2 200 switches are designed as double-break contacts. This en-sures extremely high contact stability, even when the devices are switching low voltages and currents, e.g. DC 5V / 1 mA.
06IC13_037-042.qxd 12/7/05 2:17 PM Page 13/40
13/41
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 11/49 LV10 2004
3SE2 / 3SE3 Molded plastic / metal enclosurewith separate actuator
Technical data
1) Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Type 3SE2 1, 3SE2 2, 3SE3 2 3SE2 243
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 500
Pollution degree acc. to EN 60664 Class 3
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 500; over AC 380 V only for equal potential
Continuous thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operating current Ie
• For alternating current 40 ... 60 Hz Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15 Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15AV 42 ta- 10 10 10 10AV 521 ta- 10 10 10 10AV 032 ta- 10 6 10 4AV 004 ta- 10 4 10 4AV 005 ta- 10 3 10 3
• For direct current Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13AV 42 ta- 10 10AV 84 ta- 6 4AV 011 ta- 4 1AV 022 ta- 1 0.4AV 044 ta- 0.5 0.2
Short circuit protection1),DIAZED fuse links
• Operational class gL/gG A 6
• Quick response characteristic A 10
Mechanical endurance > 1 x106 operating cycles
Electrical endurance
• With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
> 1 x106 operating cycles
• For AC-15 duty 0.5 x106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
• For DC-13 duty With DC the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given.
Operating frequencywith 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
6 x103 operating cycles/h
Type 3SE2 2003SE3 200
3SE2 243, 3SE2 257
3SE2 120
Enclosure Fiber-glass strengthened thermoplastic Aluminum (GD - AlSi 12)
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP65 IP67 IP67
Ambient temperature
• in operation –30 ... +85 °C –35 ... +85 °C
• for storage, transport
Mounting position Any
Cable entry 3SE2 200: 1 x (M 20 x 1.5)3SE3 200: Pg 13/5
1 x (M 20 x 1.5) or 1 x (M 16 x 1.5) 1 x (M 20 × 1.5)
Conductor cross-sections
• Solid 2 x 2.5 mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 1.5 mm²), 2 x (0.5 ... 1 mm²)
2 x 2.5 mm²
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 1.5 mm² 1 x (0.5 ... 1.5 mm²), 2 x (0.5 ... 1 mm²)
2 x 1.5 mm²
Protective conductor terminalinside enclosure
– M 3.5
06IC13_037-042.qxd 11/8/05 6:16 PM Page 13/41
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/58
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Interlock SwitchesSafety Systems—Safety Integrated
3SE2 120 / 2SE3 170Metal enclosure with separate actuator
13/42
Selection and ordering data
2 or 4 contacts · Moving double break contacts1)3)
Operation, operating speed and travel
Actuation/Fixing Enclo-sure width/length of ac-tuator
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Wght. ap.with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action contacts with 4 slow-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Ident. No. 11 acc. to EN 50 013
Ident. No. 02acc. to EN 50 013
Ident. No. 22 acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. ListPrice $
mm 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit kg
Metal enclosure IP 67, EN 50 0413SE2 120-0XX
Side Entry1)• M 20 x 1.5
connecting thread• 1/2” NPT
connecting thread• 4-pole M12
male receptacle
3SE2 120-0XX
3SE3 170-0XX
3SE2 120-0XX00-0AC4
87.00
92.00
123.00
3SE2 120-6XX
3SE3 170-6XX
3SE2 120-6XX00-0AC4
87.00
92.00
123.00
3SE2 120-4XX
3SE3 170-4XX
-
92.00
92.00
0.350
0.350
0.360
Actuator
• Standard 79 3SX3 197 13.00 0.027
• With transversemounting
• For lateralmounting
50
50
3SX3 206
3SX3 306
13.00
13.00
0.025
0.025
• Universal radius actuator
• Approach fromthe left
80
132
3SX3 203
3SX3 207
77.00
14.00
0.113
0.085
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1,Appendix K.
1) Supplied without actuator.2) Radius actuator (universal): Rmin > 70 mm.
3) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
Actuator Operation by a separate bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimumforce re-quired in operating direction on retraction
vmax max. operating speeddirection of operation
Internal circuit diagramTerminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
contact closedcontact open
Radius actuation: for all approach directions
Actuator in actuator head; NC is closed
Separate actuator Slow-action contacts perpendicular to plunger axis
Side operationvmax = 1 m/s
3SE2 120–.XX / 3SE3-170–.XX
Ident. No. 11
10 N
Ident. No. 02
Ident. No. 22
Wiring Diagram for M12 Connection
M12Pin
Interlock Switch,4-pole Connection Typical M12 Cable 1)
1 NO + 1 NCConnection
2 NCConnection
4-wireConnection
4-poleMale
1 21 11 Brown Receptacle2 22 12 White
3 13 21 Blue
4 14 22 Black
1) Typical 4-pole Female Plugs with black 5 meter cable: Right-angle: 3RX1542 Straight: 3RX1513
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
06IC13_037-042.qxd 2/3/06 6:29 PM Page 13/42
13/43
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double-break contacts1)2)
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Page 13/45.
Actuation/Fixing Enclo-sure width
Lengthof ac-tuator
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Wght.approx.
with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Ident. No. 11acc. to EN 50 013
Ident. No. 02acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. ListPrice $
mm 1 unit 1 unit kg
Molded plastic enclosure IP 65, EN 50 0473SE2 200-0XX03
Side actuation 31 3SE2 200-0XX03 49.00 3SE2 200-6XX03 47.00 0.085
Top actuation 31 3SE2 200-0XX04 49.00 3SE2 200-6XX04 49.00 0.100M 20 × 1.5
3SX3 196 Actuator
05rotautca dradnatS• 3SX3 196 4.00 0.016
70 3SX3 195 5.00 0.18
3SE3 200-0XX13
5 directions of approach 2)
Pg. 13.5
31 3SE3 200-0XX13 49.00 3SE3 200-6XX13 49.00 0.109
3SX3 220 Actuator
44dradnatS• 3SX3 220 5.00 0.013
• With transverse actuation 36 3SX3 221 5.00 0.013
44rotautca suidaR•4523XS3 3SX3 254 16.00 0.025
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) Supplied without actuator.2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3SE. 200Molded plastic enclosure with separate actuator
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/59
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
06IC13_043-050.qxd 11/28/05 7:50 PM Page 13/43
13/44
Selection and ordering data
1 contact · 3 contacts · Moving double-break contacts1)2)
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Page 13/45.
Actuation Enclo-sure width
Lengthof ac-tuator
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Wght.approx.
with 3 slow-action contacts with 1 slow-action contact
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Ident. No. 12acc. to EN 50 013
Wght.approx.
Ident. No. 01acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. ListPrice $
mm mm 1 unit kg 1 unit kg
Molded plastic enclosure IP 673SE2 243-0XX Top and side entry1)
M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
• Extraction force 5 N 52 3SE2 243-0XX40 46.00 1.120 3SE2 257-6XX40 41.00 0.140
• Extraction force 30 N 52 3SE2 243-0XX 46.00 1.120 3SE2 257-6XX 41.00 0.140
• With automatic ejection 52 3SE2 243-0XX30 46.00 1.120 3SE2 257-6XX30 41.00 0.140
M16 x 1.5 connecting thread
• Extraction force 5 N 52 3SE2 243-0XX48 46.00 0.140 3SE2 257-6XX48 41.00 0.140
• Extraction force 30 N 52 3SE2 243-0XX18 46.00 0.145 3SE2 257-6XX18 41.00 0.140
• With automatic ejection 52 3SE2 243-0XX38 46.00 0.140 3SE2 257-6XX38 41.00 0.140
Actuator
• Standard actuator (rmin. = 150 mm)
28 3SX3 218 5.00 0.022
• Radius actuator (universal)(rmin. = 45 mm)
33 3SX3 228 12.00 0.025
• Ball catch (up to 100 N)
28 3SX3 217 29.00 0.037
• Actuator with dust protector and slit cover (1 set)
34 3SX3 234 28.00 0.035
• Radius actuator 82 3SX3 256 14.00 0.019
Accessories
• Slit cover only for 3SX3234(1 set = 3 units)
3SX3 233 2.50
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
dnoc roF )2.rotautca tuohtiw deilppuS)1 uit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3SE. 243 / 3SE. 257Molded plastic enclosure with separate actuator
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/60
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
06IC13_043-050.qxd 11/29/05 8:22 PM Page 13/44
13/45
Operation, operating speed and travel
Actuator Operation by a separate bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimumforce re-quired in op-erating direc-tion on retrac-tion
vmax→
max. operating speeddirection of operation
Internal circuit diagramTerminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
contact closedcontact open
Radius actuation: for all approach directions
Actuator in actuator head; NC is closed
Separate actuator Slow-action contacts perpendicular to plunger axis front end operation
for top operation
3SE2 200–.XX03 3SE2 200–.XX04 1 NO+1 NC
Side actuationvmax = 1.5 m/s
Identificationnumber 11
10 N
Top actuationvmax = 1 m/s
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Top and sideactuation(4 × 90°)
3SE3 200–.XX13
Side actuation1 NO+1 NC
Ident. No. 11
10 N
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Horizontal actuation
Top and sideactuation
3SE2 243–.XX.., 3SE2 257–.XX..
Ident. No. 12
30 N or5 N
Ident. No. 01
1) Radius actuator: Rmin > 38 mm.
Actuator a bShort 42 to 45 66.5 to 69Long 62 to 65 86.5 to 89
M20 x 1.5
3SE3 200 / 3SE. 243 / 3SE. 257Molded plastic enclosure with separate actuator
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/61
06IC13_043-050.qxd 2/3/06 6:32 PM Page 13/45
13/46
Dimension drawings
Molded plastic enclosurenoitautca pot ,40XX.-002 2ES3noitautca edis ,30XX.-002 2ES3 Permissible center offset
of actuator to position switch: vertical and horizontal ±1 mm
Radius actuation: for all radii ≥ 50 mm, lateral and front-end actuation
591 3XS3 rotautca gnoL691 3XS3 rotautca trohS
3SE3 200-.XX13, 5 approach directions
Radius actuation: for all radii ≥ 50 mm, lateral and front-end actuation
452 3XS3 rotautca suidaR122 3XS3 gnitnuom esrevsnart rof rotautcA022 3XS3 rotautca dradnatS
Actuator a b
Short
Long
42 to 45
62 to 65
66.5 to 69
86.5 to 89
3SE. 200Molded plastic enclosure with separate actuator
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/62
06IC13_043-050.qxd 11/7/05 9:38 PM Page 13/46
13/47
Dimension drawings
Metal enclosure3SE. 120-.XX / 3SE3-170-.XX side entry
Actuator 3SX3 197 for lengthwise actuation Actuator 3SX3 206 for transverse actuation Universal radius actuator 3SX3 203
9
5
Molded plastic enclosure3SE2 243, side and top actuation, with standard actuator 3SX3 218
3SE2 257, side and top actuation Universal radius actuator 3SX3 228
Ball catch 3SX3 217
M20
3SE3 120 / 3SE. 243 / 3SE. 257Metal / molded plastic enclosure with separate actuator
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/63
06IC13_043-050.qxd 11/7/05 9:39 PM Page 13/47
13/48
ApplicationThe SIGUARD interlock switches with solenoid are exceptional, technically safe devices which restrict and prevent an unfore-seen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles or other covers as long as a dangerous situation is present
(i. e. operation of moving parts after the machine has been switched off).The safety switch with solenoid basically has two main func-tions:• Enabling the machine with a
closed and locked protective system
• Locking the machine with a opened protective system.
ApprovalsThe metal-enclosed SIGUARD position switches with solenoid have been awarded a test certif-icate in accordance with Ger-man regulations (BIA).
The switches are approved for use with locking devices that ac-cord to EN 1088 and EN 292, Parts 1 and 2.
ConstructionSIGUARD interlock switches with solenoid are offered in molded plastic or metal hous-ings.The separate actuator operates in a similar way to the coding of a key and protects against ma-nipulation. It transmits the lock-ing force to the protection sys-tem and helps to monitor its po-sition.There are two types of locking:• In the solenoid unlocking ver-
sion, the SIGUARD position switch locks by means of spring force and releases by means of electromagnetic force (closed-circuit principle). When a power failure occurs, it prevents com-
ponents which are still rotating from opening. For emergency situations or in setup mode, the switch is equipped with an auxiliary release which is se-cured against unauthorised use either with a seal or lock. This means that release is still possible even when a power failure occurs.
• The solenoid locking version offers locking by means of electromagnetic force and re-lease by means of spring force (open-circuit principle). This version has an advantage when it is important to get at components when a power fail-ure has occured.
ContactsSwitches with 4 contacts monitor the actuator or position of the protective door, as well as moni-tor the position of the solenoid.The mechanical design of the switches corresponds to the re-quirements of the fail-safe princi-ple of EN 1088, whereby it is not possible to close the NC con-tacts when the door is open.
OperationThe operating mechanism with side actuation can be adjusted through 4 × 90°.The 3SE3 .5. and 3SE3 .6. switches can also be ap-proached from above.A universal radius actuator is available for small actuating ra-dii; the actuator can be moved in all 4 directions.The actuators are not included with the switch and must be or-dered separately.
Functions3SE2 83 and 3SE2 84 interlock switches with solenoid are available with an optical switch indication.
An optical switch indication provides the switching posi-tion of the lock and the protec-tive device by means of 2 LEDs on the enclosure sur-
face. This option is possible only with switches that have 1NO/1NC + 1NO/1NC contact arrangement.
Protective Device Locking Mechanism Indication Meaning
tuo dellup eb ot eerf rotautcAneerG dna wolleYnepOdesolC
dekcol rotautcAneerGdesolCdesolC
dellup rotautcAwolleYnepOnepO
General dataMolded plastic / metal enclosure with solenoid
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches with Locking
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/64
06IC13_043-050.qxd 10/26/05 9:03 PM Page 13/48
13/49
Technical data
1) Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Type 3SE3 7, 3SE3 8 3SE2 8
Standards IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250
Pollution degree acc. to EN 60664 Class 3
Rated operating voltage Ue
VCD• 24
VzH 06 ... 05 CA• 110 ... 130 230
Continuous thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operating current Ie
• For alternating current 40 ... 60 Hz Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15AV 42 ta- 10 4AV 06 ta- 10 4AV 011 ta- 10 4AV 032 ta- 10 4
• For direct current Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13AV 42 ta- 10 3AV 06 ta- 5 1.5AV 011 ta- 2.5 0.7AV 022 ta- 1 0.3
Coil Power Rating W 5.5 5.2
Short circuit protection1),DIAZED fuse links
• Operational class gL/gG A 6
• Quick response characteristic A 10
Mechanical endurance 1 ×106 operating cycles
Electrical endurance
• With 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
1 ×106 operating cycles
• For AC-15 duty 0.5 ×106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
• For DC-13 duty With DC the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given.
Operating frequencywith 3RH11, 3RT10 16 to 3RT10 26 contactors
6 ×103 operating cycles/h
Type 3SE3 75, 3SE3 76 3SE3 85, 3SE3 86 3SE2 83, 3SE3 84
Enclosure Fiber-glass strengthened thermo-plastic
Aluminum (GD - AlSi 12) Aluminum (GD - AlSi 12)
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP66 IP67
Ambient temperature
• in operation –30 ... +70 °C
• for storage, transport
Mounting position Any
Cable entry Pg 13.5 M 20 × 1.5
Conductor cross-sections
• Solid 2 × 1.5 mm² 2 × 2.5 mm²
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 × 1.0 mm² 2 × 1.5 mm²
Protective conductor terminalinside enclosure
– M 3.5 M 3.5
General dataMolded plastic / metal enclosure with solenoid
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches with Locking
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/65, 11/58 LV10 2004
06IC13_043-050.qxd 11/10/05 6:47 PM Page 13/49
13/50
Selection and ordering data
4 contacts · Degree of protection IP67 · 5 directions of approach · Locking force 1200 N 1). PG 13.5 threaded opening 2)
For operation, operating speed and travel, see page 13/53
Tumbler Solenoid, rated operating voltage
Slow-action contacts/ Ident. No. acc. to EN 50013
Order No. ListPrice $1 unit
Weight approx.
Position monitor-ing of solenoid
Position monitor-ing of actuator
V kg
Molded-plastic enclosures in special widthsMechanical lock, Solenoid unlock 1) 2)
6 mm stroke
• Standard, with auxiliary release, cover screw
DC 24 1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
3SE3 760-3XX00 230.00 0.358AC 110 3SE3 762-3XX00 0.353AC 230 3SE3 761-3XX00 230.00 0.348
DC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 760-6XX00 230.00 0.357AC 110 3SE3 762-6XX00 230.00 0.350AC 230 3SE3 761-6XX00 230.00 0.350
• With auxiliary key release DC 24 1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
3SE3 760-3XX01 248.00 0.391AC 110 3SE3 762-3XX01 248.00 0.390AC 230 3SE3 761-3XX01 248.00 0.382
DC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 760-6XX01 248.00 0.390AC 110 3SE3 762-6XX01 248.00 0.391AC 230 3SE3 761-6XX01 248.00 0.377
Solenoid lock, Mechanical 6 mm strokeunlock 1) 2) DC 24 1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
3SE3 750-3XX00 236.00 0.361AC 110 3SE3 752-3XX00 236.00 0.354AC 230 3SE3 751-3XX00 236.00 0.350
DC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 750-6XX00 236.00 0.362AC 110 3SE3 752-6XX00 236.00 0.354AC 230 3SE3 751-6XX00 236.00 0.349
Actuator length:mm 44rotautca dradnatS• 3SX3 252 13.00 0.035
mm 63gnixif esrevsnart htiW• 3SX3 253 13.00 0.030
mm 44rotautca suidaR• 3SX3 254 16.00 0.025
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
1) Supplied without actuator.2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3SE33 7Molded plastic enclosure with solenoid
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches with Locking
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/66, 11/59 LV10 2004
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
06IC13_043-050.qxd 2/18/06 1:44 PM Page 13/50
13/51
3SE3 8Metal enclosure with solenoid
Interlock Switches with Locking
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/67, 11/61 LV10 2004
Safety Systems—Safety Integrated
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Selection and ordering data
4 contacts · Degree of protection IP67 · 5 directions of approach · Locking force 1200 N 1). PG 13.5 threaded opening 2)
For operation, operating speed and travel, see page 13/53
Tumbler Solenoid, rated operating voltage
Slow-action contacts/ Ident. No. acc. to EN 50013
Order No. ListPrice $1 unit
Weight per PU approx.
Position monitor-ing of solenoid
Position monitor-ing of actuator
V kg
Metal enclosures in special widthsMechanical lock, Solenoid unlock 1) 2)
6 mm stroke
• Standard, with auxiliary release, cover screw
DC 24 1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
3SE3 860-3XX00 301.00 0.727AC 110 3SE3 862-3XX00 294.00 0.722
AC 230 3SE3 861-3XX00 301.00 0.717
DC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 860-6XX00 301.00 0.725AC 110 3SE3 862-6XX00 301.00 0.715AC 230 3SE3 861-6XX00 301.00 0.712
• With auxiliary key release DC 24 1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
3SE3 860-3XX01 318.00 0.756AC 110 3SE3 862-3XX01 318.00 0.755AC 230 3SE3 861-3XX01 318.00 0.750
DC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 860-6XX01 318.00 0.757AC 110 3SE3 862-6XX01 318.00 0.766AC 230 3SE3 861-6XX01 318.00 0.747
Solenoid lock, 6 mm strokeMechanical unlock 1) 2) DC 24 1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
3SE3 850-3XX00 309.00 0.727AC 110 3SE3 852-3XX00 309.00 0.726AC 230 3SE3 851-3XX00 309.00 0.720
DC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE3 850-6XX00 309.00 0.728AC 110 3SE3 852-6XX00 309.00 0.721AC 230 3SE3 851-6XX00 309.00 0.720
:htgneLrotautcA
mm 44rotautca dradnatS• 3SX3 252 13.00 0.035
mm 63gnixif esrevsnart htiW• 3SX3 253 13.00 0.030
mm 44rotautca suidaR• 3SX3 254 16.00 0.025
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
1) Supplied without actuator.2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
06IC13_051-058.qxd 2/18/06 1:48 PM Page 13/51
SiemIndus
13/52
3SE2 8Metal enclosure with solenoid
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches with Locking
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/68, 11/63 LV10 2004
Selection and ordering data
4 contacts · Moving double-break contacts · Degree of protection IP 67 · Heavy duty · Locking force 2000 N 1)2)
For operation, operating speed and travel, see page 13/53.
Tumbler/ Signaling equipment
Solenoid,ratedoperating voltage
Slow-action contacts/ Ident. No. acc. to EN 50013
Order No. ListPrice $1 unit
Weight per PU approx.
Position monitor-ing of actuator
Position monitor-ing of solenoid kg
Mechanical lock, Solenoid unlock1) 6 mm stroke• Standard, with auxiliary release,
cover screwDC 24 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 840-0XX00 360.00 0.885AC 110 3SE2 842-0XX00 360.00 0.887AC 230 3SE2 841-0XX00 360.00 0.875
• Aux. key release DC 24 3SE2 840-0XX01 395.00 0.935AC 110 3SE2 842-0XX01 392.00 0.923AC 230 3SE2 841-0XX01 392.00 0.917
Solenoid lock, Mechanical unlock1)• Standard, with auxiliary release,
cover screwDC 24 3SE2 830-0XX00 360.00 0.887AC 110 3SE2 832-0XX00 360.00 0.855AC 230 3SE2 831-0XX00 360.00 0.855
Mechanical lock, Solenoid unlock1) 6 mm stroke• Standard, with auxiliary release,
cover screwDC 24 2 NC
Ident. No. 02
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
3SE2 840-6XX00 360.00 0.885AC 110 3SE2 842-6XX00 360.00 0.880AC 230 3SE2 841-6XX00 360.00 0.877
• Aux. release with lock DC 24 3SE2 840-6XX01 392.00 0.963AC 110 3SE2 842-6XX01 392.00 0.960AC 230 3SE2 841-6XX01 392.00 0.925
Solenoid lock, Mechanical unlock1)• Standard, with auxiliary release,
cover screwDC 24 3SE2 830-6XX00 360.00 0.885AC 110 3SE2 832-6XX00 360.00 0.854AC 230 3SE2 831-6XX00 360.00 0.849
Mechanical lock, solenoid unlock,with optical signaling equipment1)
6 mm stroke
• Standard, with auxiliary release, cover screw
DC 24 1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
3SE2 840-1XX00 360.00 0.874AC 110 3SE2 842-1XX00 360.00 0.890AC 230 3SE2 841-1XX00 360.00 0.870
• Standard, with auxiliary release, cover screw
DC 24 3SE2 840-1XX20 372.00 0.935AC 110 3SE2 842-1XX20 372.00 0.885AC 230 3SE2 841-1XX20 372.00 0.880
• Aux. key release DC 24 3SE2 840-1XX32 407.00 0.945AC 110 3SE2 842-1XX32 407.00 0.935AC 230 3SE2 841-1XX32 407.00 0.930
Mechanical lock, solenoid unlock1)42 CDdradnatS• 3SE2 830-1XX00 360.00 0.868
AC 110 3SE2 832-1XX00 360.00 0.854AC 230 3SE2 831-1XX00 360.00 0.876
• With optical switch indication DC 24 3SE2 830-1XX20 360.00 0.881AC 110 3SE2 832-1XX20 370.00 0.865AC 230 3SE2 831-1XX20 370.00 0.875
Actuator Length:mm 97rotautca dradnatS• 3SX3 197 13.00 0.027
- For approach from the left 132 mm 3SX3 207 14.00 0.045
- With transverse mounting 50 mm 3SX3 206 13.00 0.025
mm 05gnitnuom lacitrev htiW- 3SX3 306 13.00 0.025
mm 08rotautca suidar lasrevinU• 3SX3 203 77.00 0.118
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K
1) Supplied without actuator.2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
06IC13_051-058.qxd 2/18/06 1:49 PM Page 13/52
13/53
3SE. 7 / 3SE. 8Molded plastic/ metal enclosure with solenoid
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches with Locking
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/69
Operation, operating speed and travel
Actuator skcolb hctiwSrab etarapes a yb noitarepO Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimumforce re-quired in di-rection of op-eration
vmax→
max. operating speeddirection of operation
Internal circuit diagramTerminal designationsacc. to EN 50 013
contact closedcontact open
Actuator in actuator head, NC is closed
With tumbler Slow-action contacts
Axial and lateralactuation(4 × 90°)
3SE3 75.-.XX.., 3SE3 76.-.XX.., 3SE3 85.-.XX.., 3SE3 86.-.XX..
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
2 NC
1 NC
Ident. No. 01
2 NC
20 N
Ident. No. 02 Ident. No. 02
Lateralactuation(4 × 90°)
3SE2 83.-.XX.., 3SE2 84.-.XX..
vmax. = 1.5 m/smax. locking force: 2000 N, duration 5 s 2)
Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 02
10 N
Ident. No. 02 Ident. No. 02
Ident. No. 11 Ident. No. 11
1) Radius actuator (universal): Rmin > 70 mm.2) If exceeded: Internal parts destroyed.
Pg 13.5
06IC13_051-058.qxd 2/3/06 6:41 PM Page 13/53
SiemIndus
13/54
Dimension drawings
Molded plastic and metal enclosures3SE3 75.-.XX, 3SE3 76.-.XX, 3SE3 85.-.XX, 3SE3 86.-.XX Standard actuator 3SX3 252 3SX3 253 actuator
for transverse fixing
Radius actuator 3SX3 254
Metal enclosure, heavy dutyrotautca 791 3XS3noitautca laretal ,XX.-48 2ES3 ,XX.-.38 2ES3
for lengthwise fixing3SX3 206 actuatorfor transverse fixing
3SX3 207 actuator for approach direction from the left side
Universal radius actuator 3SX3 203
Pg 13.535
.3
M20x1.5
9
5
3SE. 7 / 3SE. 8Molded plastic/ metal enclosure with solenoid
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedInterlock Switches with Locking
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/70
06IC13_051-058.qxd 2/3/06 6:42 PM Page 13/54
13/55
Application3SE6 magnetic systems are de-signed for mounting on movable protective guards such as cov-ers, flaps, doors, ..., etc. The magnetically operated safety switches stand out due to their
high degree of protection (IP67) and enclosed design. They are particularly suited for areas where cleaning, disinfecting or contamination plays an impor-tant role.
Magnetic switches are offered in either 1 NC / 1 NO or 2 NC con-tacts for applications up to Cate-gory 3 or Category 4 depending on the evaluation unit selected.Up to six 3TK2830 expansion
units can be connected to one 3TK282, 3TK283, 3TK284, or 3TK285 base unit.
ConstructionA complete system consists of a coded switching magnet with switch block and a safety rated evaluation unit. Spacers should
be used for mounting on ferrous metal surfaces. The switch blocks must be actuated in order to enable the safety outputs of
the safety rated evaluation unit. If some inputs are not con-nected, the unused NO inputs of the monitor must be bridged.
Compatible systems consist of the following coded switching magnets with switch blocks and safety rated evaluation units.
Magnetic Switch Overview - Compatible Systems
1) Meets Category 3 acc. to EN 954-1 2) Meets Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1
Magnet Switch Monitor 3SE6806-2CD00
The magnet switch monitor operates as a NO circuit with two floating release circuits (safety circuits); and, as a NC circuit using a floating signal circuit. The number of release circuits can be increased by adding 3TK2830 expansion modules.
Three green LEDs indicate the status of the magnet switch monitor.• LED POWER ON: Rated con-
trol supply voltage Uc is ap-plied
• LED CHA 1 ON: All NO con-tacts of the connected magnet switches are open
• LED CHA 2 ON: All NC con-tacts of the connected magnet switches are closed
Up to six magnet switches can be connected to the magnet switch monitor. Cross-circuits between the magnet switch circuits, faults to earth and wire breaks are detected by the
magnet switch monitor. “Manual start” and “Automatic start” modes can be activated by wiring terminals X1 and X2, or X1 and X3, respectively. The monitor has six current sourcing semiconductor outputs (Y1 through Y6) which indicate the status of the connected safety devices.
Compatible System
Magnet Switch Selection
CN 2ON 1 + CN 1
3SE6 605-1BA 3SE6 605-2BA 3SE6 605-3BA 3SE6 604-2BA
Relay Output 1)
Sensor Monitor 3SE6806-2CD00
—
Electronic Output 2)
Safety relaysSirius 3TK28 4. ———
Safety relay with contactor relaysSIRIUS 3TK28 5.
———
Safety starter (Load feeder)SIRIUS 3RA7
———
AS-Interface Safety at Work3RK1
———
SIMATIC ET200 S,PROFIsafe4/8 F-DI DC 24 V
SIMATIC ET200 M,PROFIsafeSM326 DI DC 24 V,SM326 DI 8 x NAMUR
3SE6 General data
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedMagnet Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: New Page
06IC13_051-058.qxd 11/10/05 6:46 PM Page 13/55
SiemIndus
13/56
Technical data
Magnet Switches
Type3SE6 60.-1BA3SE6 60.-2BA 3SE6 60.-3BA
FormM30,25 mm x 88 mm 25 mm x 33 mm
Standards DIN EN 50947-5-3Sensing type MagneticRated voltage AC/DC 100 V DC 24 VRated current 400 mA 100 mAPerformance 10 VA/W 1 WMax. switching frequency 5 HzMax. sensing distance San ... Sab 5 ... 15 mm 4 ... 14 mmHousing material Thermoplastic strengthened with glass fiberDegree of protection acc. to IEC 60529
IP67
Permissible ambient temperature
• Operating –25 to +70 °C• Storage –25 to +70 °CShock resistance 10 g/11msVibration resistance 10 ... 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude
ConductorCable LiYY 4 x 0.25 mm2
3 m lengthReceptacle, male M12, M8 -Cable length (max for connecting to monitoring unit)
1000 m 100 m
1) Utilization category per DIN VDE 0660, Part 200, IEC 60947-5-1
2) With all release circuits loaded
Magnet Switch Monitoring Unit
Type 3SE6 806-2CD00
Standards EN 954-1, EN 1088Rated control supply voltage Uc DC 24 VRated control supply voltage tolerance 0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
Rated power(without signal outputs Y1 ... Y6) 3 WMaximum load current
• Signaling circuit Y1 ... Y6 20 mA• Signaling circuit 31, 32 2 AInputs 6 sensors (1 NO or 1 NC)Outputs 6 channel status circuits
(current sourcing)1 floating signaling circuit2 release circuits
Response time
• Automatic start 150 ms typical• Manual start 25 ms typicalRelease time 20 ms max.Recovery time 350 msDegree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20Switching capacity 1)Release circuits (13, 14 and 23, 24)Continuous current, Ith 6 ARated operational current, Ie
2)• AC-15 @ 203 V 6 A• DC-13
- 24 V 6 A- 115 V 0.2 A- 230 V 0.1 A
Short circuit protection
• Fuse type DIAZED• Duty class
- gL(gC) 6 A- Quick response 10 A
Permissible ambient temperature, Tu
• Operating –25 to +45 °C• Storage –25 to +70 °C
3SE6 General data
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedMagnet Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/84
06IC13_051-058.qxd 2/18/06 1:50 PM Page 13/56
13/57
Selection and ordering data
Design Size San ... Sab Contacts Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
mm mm 1 unit kg
Round sensor unit. IP67
3SE6 704-1BA 3SE6 605-1BA Switching magnet(coded)
M 30 3SE6 704-1BA 28.00 0.035
Switch block with 3 m cable
M 30 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE6 605-1BA 71.00 0.166
Switch block with M12, 4-pole malereceptacle1)
M 30 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE6 605-1BA02 99.00 0.130
Rectangular sensor unit. IP67
3SE6 605-2BA,3SE6 704-2BA
3SE6 605-3BA,3SE6 704-3BA
Switching magnet(coded)
25 × 88 3SE6 704-2BA 28.00 0.027
Switch block with 1 m cable
25 × 88 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
3SE6 605-2BA
3SE6 604-2BA
71.00
71.00
0.163
0.064
Switch block with M8 male receptacle
25 × 88 5 to 15 1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
3SE6 605-2BA01
3SE6 604-2BA01
85.00
85.00
0.130
0.130
Switching magnet (coded)
25 x 33 3SE6704-3BA 28.00 0.014
Switch block with 3 m cable
25 x 33 4 to 14 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE6605-3BA 71.00 0.151
Accessories
3SX3 260 3SX3 261 Spacer for rectangular sensor unit
25 × 88 3SX3 260 10.00 0.018
Spacerfor rectangular sensor unit
25 × 33 3SX3 261 10.00
Rated control supply voltage
Width Enable circuits/signal. circuits
Max. number of connectable sensors
Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
DC V mm 1 unit kg
Monitoring units
yaler ON 24200DC2-608 6ES3enabling circuits
1 Floating signaling circuit
6 Status circuits (20 mA each)
6
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6 806-2CD00 375.00 0.200
1) Pin 1 (S21) + Pin 2 (S22) = Normally Closed; Pin 3 (S13) + Pin 4 (S14) = Normally Open Typical 4-pole Female Plugs with black 5 meter cable include: 3RX1542 (right-angle) or 3RX1513 (straight plug).
3SE6
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedMagnet Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/83
06IC13_051-058.qxd 11/28/05 9:58 PM Page 13/57
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/85
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Magnet SwitchesSafety Systems—Safety Integrated
3SE6
13/58
Dimension drawings
Round sensor unitsSwitch block 3SE6 605-1BA Switch block 3SE6 605-1BA02 Coded switching magnet 3SE6 704-1BA
Rectangular sensor unitsSwitch block 3SE6 605-2BA
Switching magnet without lead
Switch block3SE6 60.-2BA0.
Switch block3SE7 704-2BA
3SX3 260 spacer
tengam gnihctiws dedoCAB3-506 6ES3 kcolb hctiwS3SE6 704-3BA
3SX3 261 spacer
Monitoring unitMagnet Switch Monitor 3SE6 806-2CD00
31,65
36,2
M30
x1,5
1,548,2
M12
x1
SW 36
NS
C0_
0066
4
M
78
1,5 725
NS
C0_
0066
9
88
3
4,5
13
3,5
0,5
Ø5
60
88
5 7,545
90
100
86105
120
NSC0_00666
06IC13_051-058.qxd 12/7/05 7:26 PM Page 13/58
13/59
3SE6
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedMagnet Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/86
Circuit diagrams
Connection exampleSingle Channel Control, Manual Start
Six Channel Control. Automatic Start
NSC0_00638a
Y11 Y12 Y32 1 Y34A1
14A2Y22Y21Y35 24
L+
M
K1 K2
BU/S12
BK/S11
WH/S21
BN/S22
BK 11
NSC0_00640a
WH 2112 BU22 BN
3SE6 604-2BA magnetically operated switch with 3TK28 safety relay, Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1
Switch block connection
The specified switching position refers to the basic position when the cover, flap etc. is closed.
3SE6 604-2BA magnetically operated switch on AS-Interface Safety at Work, safe K45F or K60F compact module, Category 4 according to EN 954-1
Abbrevitions for color designation of the connecting leads acc. to IEC 60757:BK = black BN = brownBL = blue WH = white
Power A1+, L+ Us Sensors S73, S74 Channel 1+2, NO contact (parallel))lellarap( tcatnoc ON ,4+3 lennahC48S ,38S).tnoC(CD V 42-L ,-2A)lellarap( tcatnoc ON ,6+5 lennahC49S ,39Stcatnoc CN ,1 lennahC21S ,11SsrosneS
)tcatnoc ON ytefas( 1 tiucric esaeleR41 ,31stuptuOtcatnoc CN ,2 lennahC22S ,11S)tcatnoc ON ytefas( 2 tiucric esaeleR42 ,32tcatnoc CN ,3 lennahC23S ,13S
tiucric gnilangis gnitaolF23 ,13tcatnoc CN ,4 lennahC24S ,13S6 hguorht 1 slennahC fo sutatS6Y ot 1Ytcatnoc CN ,5 lennahC25S ,15S
S51, S62 Channel 6, NC contact
Terminal Assignments
06IC13_059-064.qxd 2/3/06 6:51 PM Page 13/59
SiemIndus
13/60
Application
Two-hand operation consoles are required for use with ma-chines and systems that have hazardous areas, in order to di-rect both hands of the operator to one position.
Operation consoles are primarily used on presses, stamping ma-chines, printing presses and pa-per converting machines, in the chemical industry and in the rubber and plastics industries.
SpecificationsTwo-hand operation consoles fulfill the requirements laid down in DIN 24 980 and EN 574.
Construction
Equipment
All consoles are pre-equipped with SIGNUM 3SB3 control de-vices. The metal version is also available as an unequipped empty enclosure.
The plastic version can be retro-fitted with up to 8 command points, in line with the customer’s requirements. The surface of the console has premachined breaking points for this purpose.
Installation
The two-hand operation con-soles can be mounted either on the stand available or directly on the machine by means of the holes in the rear panel.
Principle of operation
The control command is given by pressing the two operating el-ements simultaneously (within
0.5 s of each other) and must be maintained for as long as a haz-ard exists.
Selection and ordering data
Dimension drawings
Design Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
1 unit kg
3SB38 63-4BB SIGUARD two-hand operation console
Degree of protection IP 65, acc. to DIN 24 980 (EN 574),
Standard equipment with 2 black operating elements (mushroom button 3SB30 00-1GA11, Ø 40 mm, 1 NO + 1 NC) and a red EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button 3SB30 00-1HA20, latching Ø 40 mm, 2 NC
• Metal version
- with standard equipment 3SB38 63-4BB 400.00 2.650
- with standard equipment and 4 additional holes for control devices 22.5 mm
3SB38 63-4BA 420.00 4.800
deppiuqenu ,erusolcne ytpme-QA0–10 93BS3 3SB38 63-4BC 360.00 4.800
- floor plate 3SB39 01-0AP 25.00 0.288
• Plastic version
- with standard equipment and predeterminatedbreaking points for 8 further command points 22.5 mm
- with cable inlet holes for metric screwed cable glands 3SB38 63-1BB3 260.00 2.264
Stand for SIGUARD two-hand operation consoles 16
• with cable inlet holes for metric screwed cable glands 3SB39 01-0AQ3 420.00
3SB38 63 operation console
(metal version)
Note:Also available with AS-Interface connection, contact your local Siemensrepresentative.
3SB39 01-0AQ stand
3SB39 01-0AP floor plate
493.6240 159.6
184.
1
184.
1
3SB38
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedTwo-Hand Control On Presses
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/88
06IC13_059-064.qxd 11/28/05 9:06 PM Page 13/60
13/61
ApplicationHinge switches are used for monitoring and protecting hinged protection equipment such as doors and flaps. They fulfill the function of provid-ing protection against personal injury. The NC contacts are pos-itively opened in accordance with IEC 60 947-5-1.
3SE2 200The 3SE2 200 hinge switches with snap-action contacts 1 NO/1 NC with an angle of operation of either 5° or 15° make "Switch-off" and "Warning" possible for the first time without a time delay with a small opening angle.
3SE2 283The 3SE2 283 hinge switch is particularly suitable for use in the doors and flaps of machines that must be closed to ensure the safety of operating person-nel. Its thin profile and compact design allow it to be directly mounted on a hinged protective cover and the stable frame.
Construction
3SE2 2003SE2 200 hinge switches are available in a molded plastic en-closure acc. to EN 50 047 Switches designed for mounting on hinges must be attached di-rectly to the hinge and guaran-tee ensured cut-off, with a high level of security against manipu-lation, even with very small opening angles. The switch but-
ton can be rotated through 4 x 90° after the four screws are unscrewed.
3SE2 283The 3SE2 283 hinge switch has an integrated electromechanical switch block that is actuated when the hinged protective cover is opened. If the cover is only opened by 4°, the normally closed contact is positively
opened by a direct (not spring-action) mechanism. These posi-tively driven contacts guarantee interruption of the electric circuit and stopping of the machine. The normally open contact is closed when the cover is moved by 13.5° (for signing purposes only).
Mounting on hinges
Technical data
3SE2 200
3SE2 283
Rated insulation voltage Ui ecnarudne lacinahceMV 005 1 × 106 operating cycles
Pollution degree ycneuqerf gnitarepO3 ssalC 30 operating cycles/hour
Conventional free air thermal current Ith lairetam erusolcnEA 01 Molded plastic
Actuating force noitcetorp fo eergeDmcN 51 IP 66
Ambient temperature –25 to +85 °C
Actuating speed minimum of 0.5 m/s Cable entry M 20 × 1.5
Conductor cross-section 2 x 2.5 mm2 / 2 x 14 AWG
Rated insulation voltage Ui ecnarudne lacinahceMV 052 >1 × 106 operating cycles
Conventional free air thermal current Ith ycneuqerf gnitarepOA 5.2 1200 operating cycles/hour
Rated operational current Ie Shock resistance 30 g/18 ms
• at AC-15, 250 V htgnerts noitarbiVA 2 20 g/10 to 200 Hz
• at DC-13, 24 V lairetam erusolcnEA 1 Molded plastic
Min. make-break capacity noitcetorp fo eergeDAm 1/V 5 > IP 65
Short-circuit protection erutarepmet tneibmAA 2 ,Gg –25 to +65 °C
Positive opening 2 mm after opening point Screw terminals 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 / 20 to 16 AWG
Cable entry 2 × M 20 x 1.5
3SE2 Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedHinge Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/71
06IC13_059-064.qxd 11/7/05 9:55 PM Page 13/61
SiemIndus
13/62
Selection and ordering data
2 or 3 contacts · 5° or 15° Degree of protection IP 66 (3SE2 283: IP65) · Rotatable head · M20 x 1.5 threded opening 2)
1) Supplied with switch / hinge assembly plus additional blank hinge.
2) Conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
kcolb hctiwSngiseD Molded plastic enclosure Weightapprox.
Order No. List Price $
gktinu 1
Mounting on hinges
15° switching• Solid shaft d = 10 mm
• Hollow shaft di = 8 mm
5° switching• Solid shaft d = 10 mm
• Hollow shaft di = 8 m
Snap-action contact
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
1 NO/1 NC
3SE2 200-1GA11
3SE2 200-1GA10
3SE2 200-1GA31
3SE2 200-1GA30
45.00
45.00
49.00
49.00
0.120
0.105
0.115
0.100
Hinge switch
5° switching
Slow-action contact
1 NO/2 NC 3SE2 283-0GA431) 125.00 0.4204° switching
8° switching3 NC
1 NO/2 NC3SE2 283-6GA431)
3SE2 283-0GA531)
125.00
125.00
0.420
0.800
Additional hinge 3SX3 225 35.00 0.157
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
3SE2 Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedHinge Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/72
06IC13_059-064.qxd 11/28/05 9:59 PM Page 13/62
13/63
3SE2 Molded plastic / metal enclosure
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedHinge Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/73
Dimension drawings
Circuit diagrams, travel diagrams
Switches for mounting on hinges 3SE2 200-1 GA.0
Switches for mounting on hinged flaps 3SE2 200-1 GA.1
Hinge switches 3SE2 283-.GA43
Additional hinge 3SX3 225
M M
36
19
5
NS
C 0
061
1
714276
M20
135
44
9262
3SE2 2831 NO + 2 NC
3SE2 2001 NO + 1 NC
3SE2 2833 NC
06IC13_059-064.qxd 12/7/05 7:27 PM Page 13/63
13/64
3SF3 Limit, interlock and cable-operated
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSwitches with Integrated AS-Interface
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: New page
Overview
It is possible to directly connect selected limited, interlock and cable-operated switches via AS-Interface with safety-oriented communication. In these cases the selected switches directly connect to the AS-Interface yellow cable and do not have to be hard-wired separately. All switches with integrated AS-Interface connect directly to the AS-Interface line (yellow cable) via a vam-pire connection (FK connector).
3SF3 Limit Switches with Integrated AS-Interface
Limit switches convert the mechanical positions of moving ma-chine components into electrical signals. These electrical sig-nals are detected by the AS-Interface master and/or safety mon-itor and are transferred to a PLC or network for processing.
3SF3 Interlock Switches with Integrated AS-Interface
Interlock switches with separate actuator are used in applica-tions in which the position of doors covers or guards have to be monitored for safety reasons.
3SF3 Interlock Switches with Integrated AS-Interface
Interlock switches with separate actuator are used in applica-tions in which the position of doors, covers or guards have to be monitored for safety reasons.
Interlock switches with electrical and/or mechanical locking are special safety devices that prevent the inadvertent or intentional opening of protective doors, guards or other covers when a dan-gerous state exists. These types of interlock switches have two main tasks:• Enabling a machine when a protective device is closed or
locked; and,• Disabling a machine when a protective device is open
All 3SF interlock switches can only be switched using a coded actuator. It is virtually impossible to bypass it manually by using a tool.
3SF3 Cable-Operated Switches with Integrated AS-Interface
Cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for EMER-GENCY STOP functions on particularly endangered systems sections. As the effective range of a cable-operated switch is only limited by the length of the cable, large systems can be pro-tected.
Cable-operated switches with latching for implementation in EMERGENCY STOP equipment correspond to the EN 418 stan-dard.
The safety contacts of the cable-operated switch with AS-Inter-face are positively driven.
06IC13_059-064.qxd 11/10/05 6:49 PM Page 13/64
13/65
Selection and Ordering data
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.1) Accessories, technical specifications, contact travel, switching diagrams and dimension drawings
can be found for the basic switch in this section.
Version Order No. Basic switch 1) List Price $
1 unit
WeightApprox.kg
General informationAll products of the Section AS-Interface position switches allow positive opening according to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K
AS-Interface position switches, standardvia AS-Interface F adapter with direct AS-Interface connection to Safety at Work IP65
3SF3 200-6EV00-0BA1
• Encapsulated in molded plastic,EN 50 047, 31 mm wide, slow-action contact, two NC contacts
- Rounded plungers 3SF3 200-6CV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-6C 210.00 0.150
- Roller plungers 3SF3 200-6DV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-6D 217.00 0.160
- Roller levers 3SF3 200-6EV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-6E 218.00 0.160
- Angular roller levers 3SF3 200-6FV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-6F 219.00 0.165
- Lock-and-release lever 3SF3 200-6GV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-6G 225.00 0.175
• Encapsulated in molded plastic, EN 50 047, 31 mm wide, snap-action contact, one NC contact
- Rounded plungers 3SF3 200-1CV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-1C 210.00 0.170
- Roller plungers 3SF3 200-1DV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-1D 218.00 0.160
- Roller levers 3SF3 200-1EV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-1E 219.00 0.180
- Angular roller levers 3SF3 200-1FV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-1F 225.00 0.175
- Lock-and-release lever 3SF3 200-1GV00-0BA1 3SE2 200-1G 225.00 0.175
3SF3 120-6GW00-0BA1
• With metal enclosure, EN 50 041, 40 mm wide, slow-action contact, two NC contacts
- Rounded plungers 3SF3 120-6CV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-6C 247.00 0.315
- Roller plungers 3SF3 120-6DV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-6D 254.00 0.330
- Roller levers 3SF3 120-6EV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-6E 250.00 0.300
- Angular roller levers 3SF3 120-6FV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-6F 240.00 0.285
- Lock-and-release lever 3SF3 120-6GW00-0BA1 3SE2 120-6GW 251.00 0.390
• With metal enclosure, EN 50 041, 40 mm wide, snap-action contact, one NC contact
- Rounded plungers 3SF3 120-1CV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-1C 247.00 0.335
- Roller plungers 3SF3 120-1DV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-1D 254.00 0.335
- Roller levers 3SF3 120-1EV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-1E 243.00 0.302
- Angular roller levers 3SF3 120-1FV00-0BA1 3SE2 120-1F 240.00 0.295
- Lock-and-release lever 3SF3 120-1GW00-0BA1 3SE2 120-1GW 251.00 0.390
3SF Limit switches
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSwitches with Integrated AS-Interface
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 7/17 IKPI 2005
06IC13_065-068.qxd 11/28/05 9:19 PM Page 13/65
SiemIndus
13/66
3SF Limit and interlock switches
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSwitches with Integrated AS-Interface
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 7/18 IKPI 2005
Selection and Ordering data (continued)
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
1) Accessories, technical specifications, contact travel, switching diagrams and dimension drawings. can be found for the basic switch in this section.
Version Order No. Basic switch 1) List Price $1 unit
WeightApprox.kg
AS-Interface position switch, standard, with M12 connector M12 connector for connecting an additional position switch Direct AS-Interface connection to Safety at Work can be used for up to Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1, IP65
3SF3 210-0DV00-0BA2
• Encapsulated in molded plastic, EN 50 047, 50 mm wide, slow-action contact, 1 NC contact- Rounded plungers - 3SF3 210-0CV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-0C 218.00 0.220
- Roller plungers - 3SF3 210-0DV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-0D 226.00 0.205
- Roller levers - 3SF3 210-0EV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-0E 227.00 0.120
- Angular roller levers - 3SF3 210-0FV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-0F 227.00 0.120
- Lock-and-release lever - 3SF3 210-0GV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-0G 233.00 0.240
• Encapsulated in molded plastic, EN 50 047, 50 mm wide, snap-action contact, one NC contact- Rounded plungers - 3SF3 210-1CV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-1C 218.00 0.220
- Roller plungers - 3SF3 210-1DV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-1D 226.00 0.120
- Roller levers - 3SF3 210-1EV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-1E 227.00 0.225
- Angular roller levers - 3SF3 210-1FV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-1F 227.00 0.220
- Lock-and-release lever - 3SF3 210-1GV00-0BA2 3SE2 210-1G 233.00 0.240
3SF3 100-0EV00-0BA2
• With metal enclosure, EN 50 041, 56 mm wide, slow-action contact, 1 NC contact- Rounded plungers - 3SF3 100-0CV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-0C 247.00 0.380
- Roller plungers - 3SF3 100-0DV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-0D 254.00 0.400
- Roller levers - 3SF3 100-0EV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-0E 243.00 0.180
- Angular roller levers - 3SF3 100-0FV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-0F 240.00 0.295
- Lock-and-release lever - 3SF3 100-0GW00-0BA2 3SE2 100-0GW 251.00 0.295
• With metal enclosure, EN 50 041, 56 mm wide, snap-action contact, 1 NC contact- Rounded plungers - 3SF3 100-1CV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-1C 247.00 0.390
- Roller plungers - 3SF3 100-1DV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-1D 254.00 0.295
- Roller levers - 3SF3 100-1EV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-1E 243.00 0.365
- Angular roller levers - 3SF3 100-1FV00-0BA2 3SE2 100-1F 240.00 0.295
- Lock-and-release lever - 3SF3 100-1GW00-0BA2 3SE2 100-1GW 251.00 0.445
AS-Interface position switch, with separate actuatorWith direct AS-Interface connection to Safety at Work IP65, slow-action contact, 2 NC contacts
3SF3 120-6XX00-0BA1
• Encapsulated in molded plastic, lateral operation, fixing acc. to EN 50 047
3SF3 200-6XX03-0BA1 3SE2 200-6XX03 200.00 0.180
• Encapsulated in molded plastic, front end operation, fixing acc. to EN 50 047
3SF3 200-6XX04-0BA1 3SE2 200-6XX04 200.00 0.195
• Encapsulated in molded plastic, lateral and axial operation, 52 mm wide
- Extraction force 30 N - 3SF3 243-0XX00-0BA1 3SE2 243-0XX 200.00 0.260
- Extraction force 5 N - 3SF3 243-0XX40-0BA1 3SE2 243-0XX40 200.00 0.220
- Automatic ejection - 3SF3 243-0XX30-0BA1 3SE2 243-0XX30 200.00 0.225
• With metal enclosure, fixing acc. to EN 50 041 3SF3 120-6XX00-0BA1 3SE2 120-6XX 210.00 0.440
Actuator for "AS-Interface position switch, with separate actuator"• For AS-Interface position switch, encapsulated in molded
plastic, 52 mm wide
htgnel/htdiw erusolcnEepyT
Standard (rmin = 150 mm) vvv 27 mm 3SX3 218 5.00 0.022Universal radius (rmin = 45mm) 33 mm 3SX3 228 12.00 0.025• For AS-Interface position switch metal enclosure,
mounting to EN 50 041htgnel/htdiw erusolcnEepyT
Standardv 79 mm 3SX3 197 13.00 0.027With transverse mounting 50 mm 3SX3 206 13.00 0.025With vertical mounting 50 mm 3SX3 306 13.00 0.025Universal radius 80 mm 3SX3 203 77.00 0.118
2)
2) Discount Code: Limit Switches.
06IC13_065-068.qxd 2/18/06 1:51 PM Page 13/66
13/67
3SF Interlock switches
Safety Systems—Safety SwitchesSwitches with Integrated AS-Interface
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 7/19 IKPI 2005
Selection and Ordering data (continued)
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.1) Accessories, technical specifications, contact travel, switching diagrams and dimension drawings
can be found for the basic switch in this section.
Version Order No. Basic switch 1) List Price $1 unit
Weightapproxkg
3SF3 257-6XX00-0BA2
AS interface position switch, with separate actuator and M12 connectorM12 connector for connecting an additional position switchDirect AS-Interface connection to Safety at WorkCan be used for up to Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1IP65Slow-action contact, 1 NC contactEncapsulated in molded plasticLateral and front operation, 52 mm wide
• Extraction force 30 N 3SF3 257-6XX00-0BA2 3SE2 257-6XX 210.00 0.230
• Extraction force 5 N 3SF3 257-6XX40-0BA2 3SE2 257-6XX40 210.00 0.255
• Automatic ejection 3SF3 257-6XX30-0BA2 3SE2 257-6XX30 210.00 0.260
Actuator for "AS-Interface position switch, with separate actuator and M12 plug"
Type Enclosure width/length
Standard (rmin = 150 mm)
27 mm 3SX3 218 5.00 0.022
Universal radius(rmin = 45 mm)
33 mm 3SX3 228 12.00 0.025
3SF3 750-6XX00-0BA1
3SF3 830-6XX00-0BA1
AS-Interface position switch, with separate actuator and tumblerWith direct AS-Interface connection to Safety at WorkIP65, Pg 13.5Solenoid voltage 24 V DCMonitoring of actuator and solenoid position
• Plastic enclosure
- Locking force 1200 N, spring-locked 3SF3 760-6XX00-0BA1 3SE3 760-6XX00 400.00 0.600
- Locking force 1200 N, solenoid-locked 3SF3 750-6XX00-0BA1 3SE3 750-6XX00 400.00 0.625
• Metal enclosure
- Locking force 1200 N, spring-locked 3SF3 860-6XX00-0BA1 3SE3 860-6XX00 450.00 0.800
- Locking force 1200 N, solenoid-locked 3SF3 850-6XX00-0BA1 3SE3 850-6XX00 450.00 0.970
- Locking force 2000 N, spring-locked 3SF3 840-6XX00-0BA1 3SE3 840-6XX00 525.00 1.105
- Locking force 2000 N, solenoid-locked 3SF3 830-6XX00-0BA1 3SE3 830-6XX00 525.00 1.075
Actuator for "AS-Interface position switch, with separate actuator and tumbler"
Position switch type Actuator type
Enclosure width/length
Plastic enclosure, metal enclosure 1200 N
Standard 3SX3 252 13.00 0.035
With transverse fixing
3SX3 253 13.00 0.030
Radius 3SX3 254 16.00 0.025
Metal enclosure 2000 N Standard 79 mm 3SX3 197 13.00 0.027
Standard, for approach from the left
132 mm 3SX3 207 14.00 0.045
Standard, with transverse mounting
50 mm 3SX3 206 13.00 0.025
Standard, withvertical mounting
50 mm 3SX3 306 13.00 0.025
Universal radius 80 mm 3SX3 203 77.00 0.118
06IC13_065-068.qxd 2/18/06 1:52 PM Page 13/67
13/68
3SF Cable-operated switches
Safety Systems—Safety IntegratedSwitches with Integrated Safety
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: SIRIUS Safety Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 7/20 IKPI 2005
Selection and Ordering data
1) Accessories, technical specifications, contact travel, switching diagrams and dimension drawings can be found for the basic switch in this section.
2) Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K
Version Order No. Basic switch 1) List Price $1 unit
Weightapprox.kg
General informationAll products of the Section AS-Interface cable-operated switches allow positive open-ing according to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K
AS-Interface cable-operated switcheswith direct AS-Interface connection to Safety at WorkMetal housing with dust protectionCan be used up to category 4 acc. to EN 954-1IP65Latching acc. to EN 418Pushbutton unlatching2 NC contacts 2)
• For cable lengths up to 10 m, with adjustment window
3SF2 120-1BF00-0BA1 3SE7 120-1BF00 353.00 0.620
• For cable lengths up to 25 m, with adjustment window
3SF2 150-1BF00-0BA1 3SE7 150-1BF00 361.00 0.630
• For cable lengths up to 50 m 3SF2 140-1BF00-0BA1 3SE7 140-1BF00 654.00 0.917
06IC13_065-068.qxd 11/29/05 1:10 PM Page 13/68
13/69
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210 / 3SE2 230Molded plastic enclosure
3SE Interrnational Limit Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/11, 13/6
Position Switches
Features
• UL Listed, CSA Certified, CE. Meets or exceeds other local and international standards
• Miniature (31mm) or wide miniature (50 mm) housings. Best suited in limited space applications
• Nine field interchangeable operating heads (12 variations). Interchangeable on the miniature (31 mm) and wide miniature (50 mm) styles. Reduces inventory and inventory costs
• Electrically isolated, double bridge contacts. Provides electrical flexibility
• Direct opening action (positive opening of the NC contact)
• NEMA A600, Q600 contact ratings
• Designed to EN 50047 and EN 50041 standards. True international acceptance
ApplicationThe function of position switches (limit switches) is to produce electrical signals corresponding to the positions of moving ma-chinery.The units are suitable for use in virtually any climate.The 3SE2 200 and 3SE2 210 po-sition switches with the excep-tion of types 3SE2 2.0-8. are also suitable in accordance with cer-tificate of conformity BVS No.
89.B. 1015 for EEx zones (po-tentially explosive atmosphere) according to EEx ia I.
SpecificationsIEC 60 947-5-1, or EN 60947-5-1The safety requirements of "total insulation" are guaranteed by the use of plastic for the enclo-sure and molded plastic scew glands.3SE2 200 and 3SE2 210 position switches with molded plastic en-closures comply with the acci-
dent prevention guidelines of the Swiss Accident Insurance Authority (SUVA). The following actuator types have been approved:• Plain plunger –. B• Overtravel plunger –. C• Roller plunger –. D• Roller lever –. E• Angular roller lever –. F• Roller crank –. G• Overtr. plunger M 18 × 1 –. L• Roller plunger M 18 × 1 –.M
Safety position switches3SE22 switches can be used as safety position switches in con-trol systems conforming to IEC 60 204-1, or EN 60204-1.For implementation as safety po-sition switches and/or position switches with a safety function, the devices must be mounted at a spacing of 20 mm (30 mm) and the switch must be locked with a pin or fitted with a stop.
Design
3SE2 limit switches meet or exceed the requirements of NEMA, EEMAC, UL, CSA, IEC, VDE and other local, national & international standards.The switch housing consists of a glass-reinforced fiber, flame- retardant molded plastic which is resistant to most shocks, impacts and cutting oils. The cover is captive to the switch body. The threaded cable entry is M20 × 1.5 and may be converted to 1/2”-NPT via a separately provided adaptor (3SX9918 or 3SX1998). The body
has longitudinal holes, permitting mounting with M4 screws. Housing size and mounting dimensions conform to EN 50 041 or EN 50 047. The molded housing does not require grounding. The housing is protected against the penetration of dust and water jets coming from virtually any direction. The contacts are pressed into the switch body. When the cover is opened, the switching chamber is protect by a guard preventing the ingress of contaminates.
ContactsPosition switches (limit switches) are available with snap-action contacts, slow-action contacts or slow-action make-before-break contacts.The movable normally closed and normally open switch contacts are electrically isolated from each other and are suitable for switching voltages of different potentials.The contact blocks for 3SE2230 series are field replaceable and are the same contact blocks used in the 3SE2100, 3SE2120, and 3SE3170 metal series.
Contact reliabilityThe movable switch contacts are double moving contacts. This increases the contact reliability even when the switch has to be operated with low voltages and currents, e. g. DC 5 V/1 mA. The switching point of the snap action contacts is independent of the switching speed.
Principle of operation
Positive opening
The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically, positively-driven and reliably by the plunger (positive opening).
In order to ensure this positive opening, the position switch must be actuated in such a way that the values specified for pos-itive opening under nominal travel (Pages 13/76 to 13/80)have been definitely exceeded.
Position switches that display this symbol are suitable for use in safety applications.
06IC13_069-070.qxd 10/27/05 8:21 PM Page 13/69
13/70
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210 / 3SE2 230Molded plastic enclosure
3SE Interrnational Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Technical data
1) Without any welds acc. to IEC 60947-S-1.
2) 3SE22.0-8..00 = 0.27A
3) 3SE22.0-8..00 = 0.10A
4) Refer to Section 19 General Information, for NEMA Control Circuit Ratings.
s, u and U ratings (only 3SE. 200, 3SE. 210)
• rated voltage 600 V
• continuous current 10 A
• switching capacity Heavy Duty, A 600/Q 600
- for 3SE. 2.0–8. Heavy Duty, A 300/Q 300
Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V
Pollution degree Class 3
Short circuit protection1), DIAZED-fuse links Utilization category gL/gG 6 A, quick response characteristic 10 A
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 500 V, over AC 380 V only for equal potential
AC 500 V, over AC 300 V only for equal potential (3SE22.0-8..00)
Conventional free-air thermal current Ith 10 A
Rated operational current Ie4) AC, 40 to 60 Hz DC
Ue Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15 Ue Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13
V A A V A A
24 10 10 24 10 10
125 10 10 48 6 4
230 10 6 110 4 1
400 10 4 220 1 0.42)
500 10 3 440 0.5 0.23)
Mechanical endurance 30 ×106 operating cycles (15 ×106 for 3SE2 2.0-8.)
Electrical endurance 10 ×106 operating cycles with 3RH11, 3RT10 16, 3RT10 26 contactors
• for AC-15 duty 0.5 ×106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
• for DC-13 duty With DC the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given.
Operating frequency 6 ×10³ operating cycles per hour with 3RH11, 3RT10 16, to 3RT10 26 contactors
Operating accuracy 0.05 mm for repeated switching, measured at the plunger of the switch block.
Operating point with snap-action contacts independent of contact wear constant throughout the life of the switch
Ambient temperature –30 to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)
Degree of protection DIN VDE 0470 and IEC 60 529 IP 67 (IP 66 for 3SE. 230)
Cable entry
• 3SE2 200, 3SE2 230 M 20 × 1.5
• 3SE2 210 2 × (M 20 × 1.5)
Conductor cross-sections
• solid 2 × 2.5 mm² (2 × 14 AWG)
• finely stranded with end sleeve 2 × 1.5 mm² (2 × 16 AWG)
Installation angle any
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/12, 13/7
06IC13_069-070.qxd 10/27/05 8:22 PM Page 13/70
13/71
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/75).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3) Switch body with contact block. All operating heads fit on these switch bodies.
Selection and ordering data2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 047M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/76 to 13/80.
31 mm wide 50 mm wide 2) Actuator design to EN 50 047
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Weightapprox.with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 11acc. to EN 50 013
Identification number 02 acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1 mm) Preferred type 1 unit 1 unit kg
Overtravel plunger3) B 31 3SE2 200-0C 30.00 3SE2 200-6C 30.00 0.060
– 50 3SE2 210-0C 38.00 – 0.080
Roller plunger C 31 3SE2 200-0D 38.00 3SE2 200-6D 37.00 0.065
(3SX3170) – 50 3SE2 210-0D 46.00 – 0.085
Roller lever E 31 3SE2 200-0E 39.00 3SE2 200-6E 38.00 0.064
(3SX3171) – 50 3SE2 210-0E 47.00 – 0.085
Angular roller lever
(3SX3172)
– 31 3SE2 200-0F 39.00 3SE2 200-6F 39.00 0.065
– 50 3SE2 210-0F 47.00 – 0.085
Roller crank
• finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°(3SX3173)
A 31 3SE2 200-0G 45.00 3SE2 200-6G 45.00 0.080
– 50 3SE2 210-0G 53.00 – 0.100
• adjustable length,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°(3SX3174)
– 31 3SE2 200-0U 51.00 3SE2 200-6U 50.00 0.100
– 50 3SE2 210-0U 59.00 – 0.110
Rod actuator,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• Molded plastic rod(3SX3175)
– 31 3SE2 200-0W 54.00 3SE2 200-6W 54.00 0.100
– 50 3SE2 210-0W 62.00 – 0.120
• Aluminum rod(3SX3176)
– 31 3SE2 200-0V 51.00 3SE2 200-6V 51.00 0.105
– 50 3SE2 210-0V 59.00 – 0.120
• Spring rod – 31 3SE2 200-0S 54.00 3SE2 200-6S 54.00 0.115
(3SX3177) – 50 3SE2 210-0S 62.00 – 0.120
Overtravel plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread(3SX3180)
– 31 3SE2 200-0L 47.00 3SE2 200-6L 47.00 0.080
– 50 3SE2 210-0L 55.00 – 0.085
Roller plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread(3SX3181)
– 31 3SE2 200-0M 49.00 3SE2 200-6M 49.00 0.085
– 50 3SE2 210-0M 57.00 – 0.085
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/13, 13/8
06IC13_071-076.qxd 11/30/05 8:31 PM Page 13/71
13/72
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/75).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3) Switch body with contact block. All operating heads fit on these switch bodies.
Selection and ordering data2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 047 · Special width 50 mm ·M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/76 to 13/80.
31 mm wide 50 mm wide 2) Actuator design to EN 50 047
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Weightapprox.with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action make-before-
break contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 20acc. to EN 50 013
Identification number 11 acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1 mm) 1 unit 1 unit kg
Overtravel plunger3) B 31 3SE2 200-7C 30.00 3SE2 200-3C 30.00 0.060
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3C 30.00 0.076
Roller plunger C 31 3SE2 200-7D 37.00 3SE2 200-3D 38.00 0.065
(3SX3170) – 50 – 3SE2 210-3D 38.00 0.085
Roller lever E 31 3SE2 200-7E 38.00 3SE2 200-3E 39.00 0.065
(3SX3171) – 50 – 3SE2 210-3E 39.00 0.085
Angular roller lever – 31 3SE2 200-7F 38.00 3SE2 200-3F 39.00 0.066
(3SX3172) – 50 – 3SE2 210-3F 39.00 0.085
Roller crank
• finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°(3SX3173)
A 31 3SE2 200-7G 45.00 3SE2 200-3G 45.00 0.080
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3G 45.00 0.100
• adjustable length,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°(3SX3174)
– 31 3SE2 200-7U 50.00 3SE2 200-3U 51.00 0.100
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3U 51.00 0.090
Rod actuator,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• Molded plastic rod(3SX3175)
– 31 3SE2 200-7W 54.00 3SE2 200-3W 54.00 0.100
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3W 54.00 0.115
• Aluminium rod(3SX3176)
– 31 3SE2 200-7V 51.00 3SE2 200-3V 51.00 0.100
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3V 51.00 0.125
• Spring rod(3SX3177)
– 31 3SE2 200-7S 54.00 3SE2 200-3S 54.00 0.110
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3S 54.00 0.145
Overtravel plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread(3SX3180)
– 31 3SE2 200-7L 47.00 3SE2 200-3L 47.00 0.085
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3L 47.00 0.100
Roller plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread(3SX3181)
– 31 3SE2 200-7M 49.00 3SE2 200-3M 49.00 0.087
– 50 – 3SE2 210-3M 49.00 0.130
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/14, 13/9
06IC13_071-076.qxd 11/30/05 8:32 PM Page 13/72
13/73
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see page 13/75).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3) Switch body with contact block. All operating heads fit on these switch bodies.
Selection and ordering data2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 047M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/76 to 13/80.
.
31 mm wide 50 mm wide 2) Actuator design to EN 50 047
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Weightapprox.with 2 snap-action contacts with 2 snap-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm
stroke
Identification number 11acc. to EN 50 013
Identificat. number 02 acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator1 mm) 1 unit 1 unit kg
Overtravel plunger3) B 31 3SE2 200-1C 30.00 3SE2 200-8CV00 30.00 0.060
– 50 3SE2 210-1C 38.00 3SE2 210-8CV00 30.00 0.105
Roller plunger C 31 3SE2 200-1D 38.00 3SE2 200-8DV00 37.00 0.105
(3SX3170) – 50 3SE2 210-1D 46.00 3SE2 210-8DV00 38.00 0.115
Roller lever E 31 3SE2 200-1E 39.00 3SE2 200-8EV00 38.00 0.105
(3SX3171) – 50 3SE2 210-1E 47.00 3SE2 210-8EV00 39.00 0.115
Angular roller lever – 31 3SE2 200-1F 39.00 3SE2 200-8FV00 38.00 0.106
(3SX3172) – 50 3SE2 210-1F 47.00 3SE2 210-8FV00 39.00 0.124
Roller crank
• finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°(3SX3173)
A 31 3SE2 200-1G 45.00 3SE2 200-8GV00 45.00 0.135
– 50 3SE2 210-1G 53.00 3SE2 210-8GV00 45.00 0.100
• adjustable length,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°(3SX3174)
– 31 3SE2 200-1U 51.00 3SE2 200-8UV00 50.00 0.150
– 50 3SE2 210-1U 59.00 3SE2 210-8UV00 51.00 0.145
Rod actuator,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• Molded plastic rod(3SX3175)
– 31 3SE2 200-1W 54.00 3SE2 200-8WV00 54.00 0.160
– 50 3SE2 210-1W 62.00 3SE2 210-8WV00 54.00 0.175
• Aluminium rod(3SX3176)
– 31 3SE2 200-1V 51.00 3SE2 200-8VV00 51.00 0.170
– 50 3SE2 210-1V 59.00 3SE2 210-8VV00 51.00 0.180
• Spring rod(3SX3177)
– 31 3SE2 200-1S 54.00 3SE2 200-8SV00 54.00 0.090
– 50 3SE2 210-1S 62.00 3SE2 210-8SV00 54.00 0.130
Wobble spring(3SX3178)
– 31 3SE2 200-1R 50.00 3SE2 200-8RV00 50.00 0.125
– 50 3SE2 210-1R 58.00 – 0.106
Overtravel plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread(SX3180)
– 31 3SE2 200-1L 47.00 – 0.085
– 50 3SE2 210-1L 55.00 – 0.100
Roller plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread(3SX3181)
– 31 3SE2 200-1M 49.00 – 0.070
– 50 3SE2 210-1M 57.00 – 0.100
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/15, 13/10
06IC13_071-076.qxd 11/30/05 8:33 PM Page 13/73
SiemIndus
13/74
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210 specialsMolded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/15, 13/11
Selection and ordering data2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 · EN 50 047 M12 Receptacle · Stainless steel roller · Chlorine boot · Short stroke · Teflon plunger
31 mm wide 50 mm wide 2 rotautcA)design to EN 50 047
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches Weightapprox.with 2 snap-action contacts
6 mm stroke
Identification number 11 acc. to EN 50 013switch block 3SE3 000-1A
List Price $
Actuator7 mm) Order No. 1 unit kg
Overtravel plunger5)
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
• with short stroke4)
• with teflon plunger3)
B
B
B
B
-
B
-
31
31
31
31
50
31
50
3SE2200-1CV00-0AC4
-
3SE2200-1CV00-0AH0
3SE2200-1CV01
3SE2210-1CV01
3SE2200-1XH
3SE2210-1XH
61.00
36.00
36.00
44.00
35.00
44.00
0.080
0.060
0.060
0.075
0.060
0.070
(3SX3170)
Roller plunger C 31
with 4-pole male receptacle
• (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
3SE2200-1DV00-0AC4
3SE2200-1DV00-0AA3
-
69.00
50.00
0.085
0.060
(3SX3171)
Roller lever E 31
with 4-pole, M12 male
• receptacle (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
3SE2200-1EV00-0AC4
3SE2200-1EV00-0AA3
-
70.00
51.00
0.080
0.070
(3SX3172)
Angular roller lever F 31
with 4-pole, M12 male
• receptacle (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
3SE2200-1FV00-0AC4
3SE2200-1FV00-0AA3
-
70.00
51.00
0.100
0.065
(3SX3173)
Roller crank A 31
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
3SE2200-1GV00-0AC4
3SE2200-1GV00-0AA3
-
76.00
57.00
0.095
0.100
(3SX3174)
• adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
3SE2200-1UV00-0AC4
3SE2200-1UV00-0AA3
3SE2200-1UV00-0AH0
82.00
62.00
57.00
0.100
0.100
0.100
(3SX3178)
Wobble spring
with 4-pole, M12 male
• receptacle (3SY3127)6)
• with stainless steel roller
• with chlorine boot1)
B
B
B
31
31
31
-
-
3SE2200-1RV00-0AH0 56.00 0.090
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K
1) Provides high resistance to acids, ozone or sunlight.
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.3) Optimized for lateral actuatuion and enhanced
Overtravel plunger abrasive chaacteristics.4) 1.2 mm travel, 0.6 mm hysteresis. Standard
switch 6 mm travel.
5) Switch body with contact block. All operating heads fit on these switch bodies.
6) Wiring Diagram - see page 13/90.7) The actuator heads can be subsequently
exchanged (see page 13/75).
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/76 to 13/80.
06IC13_071-076.qxd 11/30/05 8:33 PM Page 13/74
13/75
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
3SE International Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/16, 13/12
Accessories
Actuators for 3SE2 200 and 3SE2 210 position switches
The actuator heads can be sub-sequently replaced with other variants 1).
The basic version is the 3SE2 2.0-.C overtravel plunger. All the
actuator heads listed below can be fitted to this.
Actuator with mounting screws Diag. No.
For position switches 3SE2 200 –@@3SE2 210 –@@
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.kg1 unit
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
Roller plunger
• standard roller
• stainless steel roller
1 –. D
3SX3170
3SX3267
8.00
20.00
0.012
0.020
Roller lever
• standard roller
• stainless steel roller
2 –. E
3SX3171
3SX3276
9.00
30.00
0.009
0.020
Angular roller lever
• standard roller
• stainless steel roller
3 –. F
3SX3172
3SX3274
9.00
21.00
0.010
0.015
Roller crank operating headwithout lever
NotShown
3SX3270 9.00 0.020
Roller crank
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• standard roller
• lever with stainless steel roller(operating head not included)
4
NotShown
–. G 3SX3173
3SX3271
15.00
27.00
0.030
0.020
• Adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• standard roller
• lever with stainless steel roller(operating head not included)
5 –. U 3SX3174
-
21.00 0.040
Rod actuatorfinely adjustable form 10° to 10°
• molded plastic rod, 200 mm
• molded plastic rod, 300 mm(operating head not included)
• aluminum rod
• spring rod
6
NotShown
6
6
–. W
–. W
–. V
–. S
3SX3175
3SX3300
3SX3176
3SX3177
24.00
31.00
21.00
24.00
0.040
0.060
0.048
0.037
Wobble spring2)
• standard
• stainless steel, 50 mm
7 –. R
3SX3178
3SX3310
20.00
36.00
0.025
0.025
Overtravel plunger, central fixing with M 18 x 1 thread
8 –. L 3SX3180 17.00 0.027
Roller plunger, central fixing withM 18 x 1 thread
9 –. M 3SX3181 19.00 0.027
1) Not for position switches with separate actuators and for 3SE. 200–1XH and 3SE. 210–1XH position switches.
2) Not for snap action contacts.
06IC13_071-076.qxd 11/30/05 8:34 PM Page 13/75
13/76
Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax
SH
operat. pt. acc. to EN 50 047max. operating speed
travel acc. to EN 50 047travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 047travel acc. to EN 50 047contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Overtravel plunger, Type B along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis along plunger axis
3SE2 200–.C, 3SE2 210–.C
vmax. = 1 m/s
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC with make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NO
Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Roller plunger, Type C along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis along plunger axis
3SE2 200–.D, 3SE2 210–.D
vmax. = 1 m/s
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC with make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NO
Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
NS
C00
035
S=
27±
2
27
21-2
2
0 mm
13-1
4
25,5**
28*
16,5
NS
C00
037
S=1
8,5±
2
11-1
2
0 mm
21-2
2
18,5*
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/17, 13/13
06IC13_071-076.qxd 11/8/05 8:44 AM Page 13/76
13/77
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/18, 13/14
Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax
SH
operating point acc. to EN 50 047max. operating speedtravel acc. to EN 50 047travel differencedirection of operation
terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 047travel acc. to EN 50 047contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller lever, Type E perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 200–.E, 3SE2 210–.E
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Angular roller lever along plunger axis along plunger axis
3SE2 200–.F, 3SE2 210–.F
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
The approach example is applicable for 3SE2 200 and is not possible for 3SE2 210 in this form.
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NO
Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
NSC00043
S=12±2
1221-22
0
mm13-14
14**
9*
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_077-082.qxd 11/8/05 1:49 PM Page 13/77
SiemIndus
13/78
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/19, 13/15
Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax
SH
operating point acc. to EN 50 047 max. operating speedtravel acc. to EN 50 047travel differencedirection of operation
terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
ref. line acc. to EN 50 047travel acc. to EN 50 047contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller crank, Type A perpendicular to plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 200–.G
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NO
Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Roller crank perpendicular to plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis
adjustable length,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 200–.U, 3SE2 210–.U
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
23
NSC00064
S=23±2
11-12
mm21-22
13
0
*
06IC13_077-082.qxd 11/9/05 2:43 PM Page 13/78
13/79
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/20, 13/16
Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax
operating point acc. to EN 50 047max. operating speeddirection of operation
terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-line
*
ref. line acc. to EN 50 047contact closedcontact openoperating point on return
Rod actuator in direction of rotation in direction of rotation
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 200–.W,3SE2 210–.W
3SE2 200–.V,3SE2 210–.V
3SE2 200–.S,3SE2 210–.S
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NO
Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Spring rod perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 200–1R, 3SE2 210–1R
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 18 N
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_077-082.qxd 11/9/05 2:43 PM Page 13/79
SiemIndus
13/80
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/21, 13/17
Operation, operating speed and travel of actuators
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax
SH
operating point acc. to EN 50 047max. operating speedtravel acc. to EN 50 047travel differencedirection of operation
terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 047travel acc. to EN 50 047contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Overtravel plunger along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis along plunger axis
Central mounting with M 18 thread
3SE2 200–.L, 3SE2 210–.L
vmax. = 1 m/s
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
Ident. No. 11
2 NO
2NOIdent. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Overtravel plungerCentral mounting with M 18 thread
3SE2 200–.M, 3SE2 210–.M
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
vmax. = 1 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 9 N
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
06IC13_077-082.qxd 11/14/05 11:47 AM Page 13/80
13/81
3SE2 200 / 3SE2 210Molded plastic enclosure, 31 and 50 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/22, 13/18
Dimension drawings
3SE2 200 and 3SE2 210 3SE2 200, narrow enclosure acc. to EN 50 047, with overtravel plunger, Type B
3SE2 210, wide enclosure, with overtravel plunger
E epyT ,revel relloRC epyT ,regnulp relloR
* Lever in final position
Angular roller lever
* Lever in final position
regnulp levartrevOA epyT ,knarc relloR ,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread
Roller plunger,central fixing with M 18 × 1 thread
gnirps elbboWrotautca doRhtgnel elbatsujda ,knarc relloR
06IC13_077-082.qxd 10/19/05 2:32 PM Page 13/81
13/82
3SE2 230Molded plastic enclosure, 40mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/24, 13/19
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 66 degree of protection · EN 50 041 · M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
The switch has the same construction as the 3SE2 120-.. metal-enclosed switch detailed on Pages 13/87 to 13/91. For operation, operating speed and travel or angle see Pages 13/100 to 13/105.
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Weightapprox.
40 mm wide 2) with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Actuator design to EN 50 041
Identification number 11 acc. to EN 50 013
Identification number 02acc. to EN 50 013
Identification number 20acc. to EN 50 013
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1)Diagram No. 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit kg
1
2
3
4
Overtravel plunger B 1 3SE2 230-0C 38.00 3SE2 230-6C 38.00 3SE2 230-7C 38.00 0.115Roller plunger C 2 3SE2 230-0D 41.00 3SE2 230-6D 41.00 3SE2 230-7D 41.00 0.120Roller lever – 3 3SE2 230-0E 44.00 3SE2 230-6E 44.00 3SE2 230-7E 44.00 0.130Angular roller lever,molded plastic act.
– 4 3SE2 230-0F 43.00 3SE2 230-6F 43.00 3SE2 230-7F 43.00 0.135
Roller crank
• finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
A 5 3SE2 230-0GW 48.00 3SE2 230-6GW 48.00 3SE2 230-7GW 48.00 0.150
• adjustable length,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
– 6 3SE2 230-0U 57.00 3SE2 230-6U 57.00 3SE2 230-7U 57.00 0.160
Rod actuator D 7• molded plastic rod 3SE2 230-0W 58.00 3SE2 230-6W 58.00 3SE2 230-7W 58.00 0.160• Aluminium rod 3SE2 230-0V 56.00 3SE2 230-6V 56.00 3SE2 230-7V 56.00 0.170Switch body withswitch block without actuator
3SE2 230-0A 31.00 3SE2 230-6A 31.00 3SE2 230-7A 31.00 0.095
5
6
7
8
40 mm wide 2) 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches
with 2 slow-action make before-break contacts
with 2 snap-action contacts with 2 snap-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 11acc. to EN 50 013
Identification number 11 acc. to EN 50 013
Identification number 02 acc. to EN 50 013
Overtravel plunger B 1 3SE2 230-3C 31.00 3SE2 230-1C 38.00 3SE2 230-8CV00 38.00 0.125Roller plunger C 2 3SE2 230-3D 38.00 3SE2 230-1D 41.00 3SE2 230-8DV00 41.00 0.130Roller lever – 3 3SE2 230-3E 41.00 3SE2 230-1E 44.00 3SE2 230-8EV00 44.00 0.130Angular roller lever,molded plastic act.
– 4 3SE2 230-3F 44.00 3SE2 230-1F 43.00 3SE2 230-8FV00 43.00 0.132
Roller crank
• finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
A 5 3SE2 230-3GW 43.00 3SE2 230-1GW 48.00 3SE2 230-8GW00 48.00 0.155
• adjustable length,finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
– 6 – 3SE2 230-1U 57.00 3SE2 230-8UW00 57.00 0.160
Rod actuator D 7• molded plastic – 3SE2 230-1W 58.00 3SE2 230-8WW00 58.00 0.160• Aluminium – 3SE2 230-1V 56.00 3SE2 230-8VW00 56.00 0.170Wobble spring – 8 – 3SE2 230-1R 81.00 3SE2 230-8RV00 81.00 0.150Switch body withswitch block without actuator
3SE2 230-3A 31.00 3SE2 230-1A 31.00 3SE2 230-8AV00 31.00 0.095
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently replaced with other variants (see following page).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
06IC13_077-082.qxd 2/18/06 1:53 PM Page 13/82
13/83
3SE2 230Molded plastic enclosure, 40mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/25, 13/20
Selection and ordering data
Actuator heads for 3SE2 230 position switchesThe actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged.
1) Only for snap-action contacts.
Operating mechanism with mounting screws and gasket
For position switches 3SE. 2230 –
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
1 unit kg
Overtravel plunger –.C 3SX3160 18.00 0.021
Roller plunger
• molded plastic roller, 13 mm dia. (standard)
• stainless steel roller, 13 mm dia.
–.C
3SX3161
3SX3262
23.00
35.00
0.024
0.010
Roller lever
• molded plastic roller, 22 mm dia. (standard)
–.E
3SX3164 27.00 0.034
Angular roller lever
• molded plastic roller, 22 mm dia. (standard)
–.F
3SX3168 27.00 0.036
Roller crank
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10° (supplied with operating head & lever)
• molded plastic roller, 19 mm dia. (standard)–.GW
3SX3167 32.00 0.048
Adjustable Roller crank
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10° (supplied with operating head & adjustable lever)
• molded plastic roller, 19 mm dia. (standard)–.U
3SX3163 37.00 0.058
Rod Actuator, adjustable length
(supplied with operating head & rod)
• aluminum rod
• molded plastic roller, 22 mm dia. (standard)
–.V
–.W
3SX3165
3SX3166
40.00
37.00
0.069
0.061
Wobble spring1) standard –.R
• spring 50 mm, plastic rod 50 mm (standard) 3SX3210 41.00 0.051
• spring 50 mm, stainless steel rod 50 mm 3SX3281 77.00 0.060
• spring 150 mm, stainless steel rod 50 mm 3SX3311 82.00 0.080
• spring 23.5 mm, plastic rod 10 mm 3SX3282 66.00 0.020
• spring 23.5 mm, plastic rod 50 mm 3SX3285 66.00 0.020
• spring 50 mm, plastic rod 50 mm (standard)with increased corrosion protection
• spring 150 mm, plastic rod 50 mm
3SX3284
3SX3283
85.00
66.00
0.050
0.070
Roller crank operating head(without lever)
–.GW, -.U, -.V, -.W3SX3305 12.00 0.030
Roller crank levers(operating head not included)
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10° –.GW
• molded plastic roller, 19 mm dia. (standard) 3SX3212 9.00 0.020
• stainless steel roller, 19 mm dia. 3SX3265 21.75 0.025
• molded plastic roller, 30 mm dia. 3SX3278 17.00 0.020
• molded plastic roller, 50 mm dia. 3SX3301 18.00 0.020
• U.-.aid mm 05 ,rellor rebbur 3SX3280 16.00 0.020
• adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• molded plastic roller, 19 mm dia. (standard) 3SX3213 24.00 0.024
• stainless steel roller, 19 mm dia. 3SX3268 37.00 0.030
• molded plastic roller, 30 mm dia. 3SX3302 30.00 0.025
• rubber roller, 50 mm dia. 3SX3304 32.00 0.020
3SX3160
3SX3161
3SX3164
3SX3168
3SX3167
3SX3163
3SX3165
3SX3210
06IC13_083-088.qxd 12/14/05 4:48 PM Page 13/83
SiemIndus
13/84
3SE2 230Molded plastic enclosure, 40mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/26, 13/21
06IC13_083-088.qxd 10/28/05 1:15 PM Page 13/84
13/85
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 303 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure and open type
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/27, 13/22
Features
• UL Listed, CSA Certified, CE. Meets or exceeds most local, national and international standards.
• Standard (40 mm) or Wide (56 mm) die-cast aluminum housing. Offers increased wiring space, additional cable
entry options and corrosion resistant housing
• Standard (40 mm) offerings can accomodate both U.S. 29.4 [1.16] × 59.5 [2.34] and DIN 30 [1.18] × 60 [2.36] mounting dimensions
• Nine field interchangeable operating heads (12 variations). Interchangeable on both the standard (40 mm) and wide (56 mm) styles. Reduces inventory and inventory costs
• Field replaceable, electrically isolated, double bridge
contacts. Provides electrical flexibility and ease of maintenance
• Direct opening action (positive opening) of the NC contact
• NEMA A600, Q600 contact ratings
ApplicationThe function of position switches (limit switches) is to produce electrical signals corresponding to the positions of moving ma-chinery.The units are suitable for use in virtually any climate.
SpecificationsIEC 60 947-5-1.
The 3SE2 100 and 3SE2 120 po-sition switches correspond to Swiss regulations (SUVA). The following actuator types have been approved:
• Plunger –. B• Overtravel plunger –. C• Roller plunger –. D• Roller lever –. E• Angular roller lever –. F• Roller crank –. GWIn addition, the open-type 3SE3 position switches and the 3SE3 switch inserts are also permit-ted.
Safety position switchesThe 3SE. position switches with metal enclosures and snap-ac-tion contacts as well as devices with slow-action contacts can be used as safety position switches in control systems conforming to EN 60 204-1, or IEC 60 204-1.
Construction3SE position switches are avail-able in die-cast standard (40 mm) or wide (50 mm) aluminum enclosures or as open-type units.The 3SE2 120/3SE3 170 position switches with standard enclo-sure, overtravel plunger, roller plunger, rod and roller crank ac-tuators, conform to EN 50 041. These specifications define the most important mounting dimen-sions, operating points, enclo-sure types and actuator types.Position switches have one or three cable entries. The cable entry has a 1/2”-NPT (3SE3) or M20 x 1.5 (3SE2) threaded metal wire opening. (see also Accessories, Page 13/97)
ActuatorsAll actuators can be retro-fitted or exchanged for another ver-sion. They can also be reposi-tioned every 90° so that the switches can be operated from any of the four sides.• The position switches with
roller lever are approached perpendicular to the plunger axis and position switches with angular roller lever are ap-proached in parallel with the plunger axis.
• The roller crank actuators, ad-justable-length roller crank actu-ators and rod actuators can be operated from both sides and be positioned from 10° to 10° on the actuating spindle. The roll-ers of the actuators are made from wear resistant plastic.
• The wobble spring can be ap-proached from any direction.
• The forked lever actuator has two defined switching posi-tions. The actuating element causes changeover from one position to the other. This actu-ator is suitable for two-channel operation.
The open-type 3SE. position switches are available exclu-sively with a plunger actuator.Important: The 3SE. position switches with metal enclosure are not permit-ted to be used as stops.
ContactsThe position switches (limit switches) are available with snap-action contacts, slow-ac-tion contacts or slow-action make-before-break contacts.
The 3SE. position switches with a metal enclosure are available with 2, 3 or 4 contacts.The movable normally closed and normally open switch con-tacts are electrically isolated from each other and are suitable for switching voltages of differ-ent potentials.
Contact reliabilityThe movable switch contacts are double moving contacts. This increases the contact reli-ability even when the switch has to be operated with low voltages and currents, e. g. DC 5 V/1 mA.The switching point of the snap action contacts is independent of the switching speed.The contact chamber is covered to prevent ingress of foreign bodies.
Principle of operation
Positive opening
The opening contacts of the switch are forced open mechan-ically, positively-driven and reli-ably by the plunger (positive-opening).
In order to ensure this positive opening, the position switch must be actuated in such a way that the nominal travel (Pages 13/100 to 13/112) and angle for the positive opening are sub-stantially exceeded.
Position switches that display this symbol are suitable for use in safety applications.
06IC13_083-088.qxd 10/31/05 3:42 PM Page 13/85
SiemIndus
13/86
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 303 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure and open type, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/28, 13/23
Technical data
1) Without any welding acc. to DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
2) 3SE21.0 - and 3SE3170 - 8..00: 0.27A
3) 3SE21.0 - and 3SE3170 - 8..00: 0.10A
4) Refer to Section 19, General Infor-mation for NEMA Control and Circuit Ratings.
s, u and U ratings (with metal enclosure)
• rated voltage AC 600 V
• continuous current 10 A
• switching capacity Heavy Duty, A 600/Q 600
- for 3SE. ...–8. Heavy Duty, A 300/Q 30
Rated insulation voltage Ui 500 V
Pollution degree Class 3
Short circuit protection1), DIAZED-fuse links Utilization category gL/gG 6 A, quick response characteristic 10 A
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 500 V, over 300 V only for equal potential (3SE21.0-and 35E3170-8..00) AC 500 V, over AC 380 V only for equal potential
Conventional free-air thermal current Ith 10 A
Rated operational current Ie4) AC 40 to 60 Hz DC
Ue Ie / AC-12 Ie / AC-15 Ue Ie / DC-12 Ie / DC-13
V A A V A A
24 10 10 24 10 10
125 10 10 48 6 4
230 10 6 110 4 1
400 10 4 220 1 0.42)
500 10 3 440 0.5 0.23)
Mechanical endurance 30 ×106 operating cycles (15 ×106 for 3SE3 2.0-8.)
Electrical endurance 10 ×106 operating cycles with 3RH11, 3RT10 16, 3RT10 17, 3RT10 24 to 3RT10 26 (3TH4, 3TF40 to 3TF43) contactors
• for AC-15 duty 0.5 ×106 operating cycles when interrupting Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
• for DC-13 duty With DC the contact endurance depends not only on the breaking current but also on the voltage, the circuit inductance and the speed of switching. No generally valid information can be given.
Operating frequency 6 ×10³ operating cycles per hour with 3RH11, 3RT10 16, 3RT10 17, 3RT10 24 to 3RT10 26 (3TH4, 3TF40 to 3TF43) contactors
Operating accuracy 0.05 mm for repeated switching, measured at the plunger of the switch block.
Operating point With snap-action contacts independent of contact wear constant throughout the life of the switch
Ambient temperature –30 to +85 °C (-22 to +185°F)
Degree of protection DIN VDE 0470 and IEC 60 529
• with metal enclosure IP 67
• open-type IP 20 (terminals), IP 40 (switching chamber)
• electrical plug and socket connection IP 65
Enclosure cable entry 1 × 1/2”-NPT (3SE3); 1 x M 20 × 1.5 (3SE212) or 3 x M20 x 1.5 (3SE2100, 2303, 2404)
Conductor cross-sections
• solid 2 × 2.5 mm² (2 × 14 AWG)
• finely stranded with end sleeve 2 × 1.5 mm² (2 × 16 AWG)
Installation angle Any
Enclosure material Metal (GD – AlSi 12)
Protective conductor terminal M 3.5 inside enclosure
06IC13_083-088.qxd 11/30/05 11:20 PM Page 13/86
13/87
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/29, 13/24
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 041
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/100 to 13/105.
40 mm wide 56 mm wide 2) Actuator design to EN 50 041
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Weight approx.with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 11acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 000-0A
Identification number 02acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 000-6A
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1) mm 1 unit 1 unit kgPlunger – 40 3SE@ 1@0-0B 50.00 3SE@ 1@0-6B 50.00 0.190(3SX3100) 56 3SE2 100-0B 50.00 3SE2 100-6B 50.00 0.220
Overtravel plunger B 40 3SE@ 1@0-0C 67.00 3SE@ 1@0-6C 67.00 0.230(3SX3106) 56 3SE2 100-0C 67.00 3SE2 100-6C 67.00 0.258
Roller plunger C 40 3SE@ 1@0-0D 74.00 3SE@ 1@0-6D 74.00 0.250(3SX3107) 56 3SE2 100-0D 74.00 3SE2 100-6D 74.00 0.280
Roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3102)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-0E 63.00 3SE@ 1@0-6E 63.00 0.21056 3SE2 100-0E 63.00 3SE2 100-6E 63.00 0.240
Angular roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3104)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-0F 60.00 3SE@ 1@0-6F 60.00 0.22556 3SE2 100-0F 60.00 3SE2 100-6F 60.00 0.240
Roller crank
• finely adjustable Afrom 10° to 10°(3SX3211 + 3SX3212)
40 3SE@ 1@0-0GW 71.00 3SE@ 1@0-6GW 71.00 0.30556 3SE2 100-0GW 71.00 3SE2 100-6GW 71.00 0.335
• adjustable length, finely – adjustable from 10° to 10°(3SX3211 + 3SX3213)
40 3SE@ 1@0-0UW 87.00 3SE@ 1@0-6UW 87.00 0.31556 3SE2 100-0UW 87.00 3SE2 100-6UW 87.00 0.333
Rod actuator
finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
D
• Molded plastic rod(3SX3211 + 3SX3215)
40 3SE@ 1@0-0WW 82.00 3SE@ 1@0-6WW 82.00 0.31556 3SE2 100-0WW 82.00 3SE2 100-6WW 83.00 0.348
• Aluminum rod(3SX3211 + 3SX3214)
40 3SE@ 1@0-0VW 83.00 3SE@ 1@0-6VW 83.00 0.32156 3SE2 100-0VW 83.00 3SE2 100-6VW 83.00 0.354
Switch body with switch blockwithout actuator
4056
3SE@ 1@0-0A3SE2 100-0A
44.0044.00
3SE@ 1@0-6A3SE2 100-6A
44.0044.00
0.1750.203
Order No. suffix• with metric connecting thread M 20 × 1.5
I.E. 3SE@1 @0 • with 1/2” - NPT connecting thread
I.E. 3SE@1 @0
2 . 2
3 . 7
2 . 2
3 . 7
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/95).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
2 2
3 7
06IC13_083-088.qxd 2/18/06 1:55 PM Page 13/87
13/88
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/30, 13/25
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 041
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/100 to 13/105.
40 mm wide 56 mm wide 2) Actuator design to EN 50 041
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Weight approx.with 2 slow-action contacts with 2 slow-action make before-
break contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 20acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 000-7A
Identification number 11acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 000-3A
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1) mm 1 unit 1 unit kgPlunger – 40 3SE@ 1@0-7B 50.00 3SE@ 1@0-3B 50.00 0.195(3SX3100) 56 3SE2 100-7B 50.00 3SE2 100-3B 50.00 0.220
Overtravel plunger B 40 3SE@ 1@0-7C 67.00 3SE@ 1@0-3C 67.00 0.230(3SX3106) 56 3SE2 100-7C 67.00 3SE2 100-3C 67.00 0.259
Roller plunger C 40 3SE@ 1@0-7D 74.00 3SE@ 1@0-3D 74.00 0.252(3SX3107) 56 3SE2 100-7D 74.00 3SE2 100-3D 74.00 0.277
Roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3102)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-7E 63.00 3SE@ 1@0-3E 63.00 0.20956 3SE2 100-7E 63.00 3SE2 100-3E 63.00 0.239
Angular roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3104)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-7F 60.00 3SE@ 1@0-3F 60.00 0.22056 3SE2 100-7F 60.00 3SE2 100-3F 60.00 0.236
Roller crank
• finely adjustable Afrom 10° to 10°(3SX3211 + 3SX3212)
40 3SE@ 1@0-7GW 75.00 3SE@ 1@0-3GW 71.00 0.30556 3SE2 100-7GW 71.00 3SE2 100-3GW 71.00 0.328
• adjustable length, finely – adjustable from 10° to 10°(3SX3211 + 3SX3213)
40 3SE@ 1@0-7UW 87.00 3SE@ 1@0-3UW 87.00 0.31556 3SE2 100-7UW 87.00 3SE2 100-3UW 87.00 0.336
Rod actuator
finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
D
• Molded plasticrod(3SX3211 + 3SX3215)
40 3SE@ 1@0-7WW 82.00 3SE@ 1@0-3WW 82.00 0.19056 3SE2 100-7WW 83.00 3SE2 100-3WW 83.00 0.200
• Aluminum rod(3SX3211 + 3SX3214)
40 3SE@ 1@0-7VW 83.00 3SE@ 1@0-3VW 83.00 0.19056 3SE2 100-7VW 83.00 3SE2 100-3VW 83.00 0.200
Switch body with switch blockwithout actuator
4056
3SE@ 1@0-7A3SE2 100-7A
44.0044.00
3SE@ 1@0-3A3SE2 100-3A
44.0044.00
0.1750.203
Order No. suffix• with metric connecting thread M 20 × 1.5
I.E. 3SE@1 @0• with 1/2” - NPT connecting thread
I.E. 3SE@1 @0
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
2 . 2
3 . 7
2 . 2
3 . 7
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/95).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
2 2
3 7
06IC13_083-088.qxd 2/18/06 1:55 PM Page 13/88
13/89
3SE2120 SpecialsMetal enclosure, 40 and 56mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/31,13/26
@
2
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 041
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/100 to 13/105.
40 mm wide 56 mm wide 2) Actuator design to EN 50 041
Enclosure width
3SE. position switches 3SE3 position switches Weight approx.with 2 snap-action contacts with 2 snap-action contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm strokeIdentification number 11acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 000-1A 2)
Identification number 02 acc. to EN 50 013 switch block 3SE3 000-8AV00 2)
Order No. ListPrice $
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1) mm 1 unit 1 unit kgPlunger – 40 3SE@ 1@0-1B 50.00 3SE@ 1@0-8BV00 50.00 0.190(3SX3100) 56 3SE2 100-1B 50.00 3SE2 100-8BV00 50.00 0.225
Overtravel plunger B 40 3SE@ 1@0-1C 67.00 3SE@ 1@0-8CV00 67.00 0.230(3SX3106) 56 3SE2 100-1C 67.00 3SE2 100-8CV00 67.00 0.260
Roller plunger C 40 3SE@ 1@0-1D 74.00 3SE@ 1@0-8DV00 74.00 0.255(3SX3107) 56 3SE2 100-1D 74.00 3SE2 100-8DV00 74.00 0.279
Roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3102)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-1E 63.00 3SE@ 1@0-8EV00 63.00 0.21056 3SE2 100-1E 63.00 3SE2 100-8EV00 63.00 0.239
Angular roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3104)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-1F 60.00 3SE@ 1@0-8FV00 60.00 0.22556 3SE2 100-1F 60.00 3SE2 100-8FV00 60.00 0.242
Roller crank
• finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
(3SX3211 + 3SX3212)
A 40 3SE@ 1@0-1GW 71.00 3SE@ 1@0-8GW00 71.00 0.305
56 3SE2 100-1GW 71.00 3SE2 100-8GW00 71.00 0.331
• adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
(3SX3211 + 3SX3213)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-1UW 87.00 3SE@ 1@0-8UW00 87.00 0.31556 3SE2 100-1UW 87.00 3SE2 100-8UW00 87.00 0.336
Rod actuator
finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
D
• Molded plastic rod 40 3SE@ 1@0-1WW 82.00 3SE@ 1@0-8WW00 82.00 0.315(3SX3211 + 3SX3215) 56 3SE2 100-1WW 82.00 3SE2 100-8WW00 82.00 0.346• Aluminum rod 40 3SE@ 1@0-1VW 83.00 3SE@ 1@0-8VW00 83.00 0.320(3SX3211 + 3SX3214) 56 3SE2 100-1VW 83.00 3SE2 100-8VW00 83.00 0.355Wobble spring – 40 3SE@ 1@0-1R 81.00 3SE@ 1@0-8RV00 81.00 0.230(3SX3126) 56 3SE2 100-1R 81.00 3SE2 100-8RV00 81.00 0.270
Fork lever, latching(3SX3127 + 3SX3115)
– 40 3SE@ 1@0-1T 117.00 – 0.34056 3SE2 100-1T 117.00 – 0.360
Switch body
with switch blockwithout actuator
4056
3SE@ 1@0-1A
3SE2 100-1A
44.00
44.00
3SE@ 1@0-8AV00
3SE3 100-8AV00
44.00
44.00
0.1750.203
Order No. suffix• with metric connecting thread M 20 x 1.5
I.E. 3SE@1@0• with 1/2” - NPT connecting thread
I.E.
2 . 2
3 . 7
2 . 2
3 . 7
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/95).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
2
33SE 1@07
06IC13_089-094.qxd 2/18/06 1:57 PM Page 13/89
SiemIndus
13/90
3SE2120 SpecialsMetal enclosure, 40mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:9/31, 13/27
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 041 · with 4-pole or 5-pole male receptacle
Wiring Diagram for M12 Connections
40 mm wide Actuator design toEN 50 041
Enclosure width
3SE3 position switches Weight approx.with 2 snap-action contacts
6 mm stroke
Identification number 11acc. to EN 50 013.switch block 3SE3 000-1A)
Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1 mm) 1 unit kg
Plunger
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
– 40
3SE2 120-1BV00-0AC4
3SE2 120-1BV00-0AC5
67.00 0.200
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle 70.00 0.200
Overtravel plunger B 40
3SE2 120-1CV00-0AC4
3SE2 120-1CV00-0AC5
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
84.00
87.00
0.200
0.200
Roller plunger C 40
3SE2 120-1DV00-0AC4
3SE2 120-1DV00-0AC5
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
91.00
94.00
0.265
0.265
Roller lever
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
– 40
3SE2 120-1EV00-0AC4
3SE2 120-1EV00-0AC5
80.00
83.00
0.225
0.200
Angular roller lever
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
– 40
3SE2 120-1FV00-0AC4
3SE2 120-1FV00-0AC5
67.00
70.00
0.230
0.230
Roller crank
• finely adjustable from 10º to 10º
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
A 40
3SE2 120-1GW00-0AC4 88.00 0.310
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
• adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10º to 10º
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
3SE2 120-1GW00-0AC5 91.00 0.310
3SE2 120-1UW00-0AC4 104.00 0.325
Switch body with contact blockwithout operating head
– 40
• with 4-pole, M12 male receptacle
• with 5-pole, M12 male receptacle
3SE2 120-1AV00-0AC4
3SE2 120-1AV00-0AC5
61.00
64.00
0.180
0.180
M12Pin
Limit Switch,Snap-Action Contacts 22) Typical M12 Cable3)
4-poleConnection
5-poleConnection
4-wireConnection
5-wireConnection
1 21 21 Brown Brown
2 22 22 White White
3 13 13 Blue Blue
4 14 14 Black Black
5 N/A Ground N/A Green
Positive opening acc. to IEC60 947-5-1, Appendix K
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/95).2) 21 & 22 = Normally Closed; 13 & 14 = Normally Open.
3) Typical M12 female plug with 5 meter cable. 4-pole 5-poleRight-angle 3RX1542 3RX1631Straight 3RX1513 3RX1570
Metal enclosure
4-pole 5-poleMale Receptacle
06IC13_089-094.qxd 11/29/05 6:10 PM Page 13/90
13/91
3SE2 120 SpecialsMetal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/31, 13/28
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · EN 50 0411 or 2 LEDs · Stainless steel roller/rod · Increased corrosion protection
40 mm wide 2) Actuatordesign to EN 50 041
Enclosure width
3SE3 position switches Weightapprox.with 2 snap-action contacts
6 mm strokeIdentification number 11acc. to EN 50 013switch block 3SE3 000-8AV00 2)
ListPrice $
Actuator 1 mm) Order No. 1 unit kg
Plunger• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3) 5)• with increased corrosion protection
– 403SE2120-1AV00-0AF0 + 3SX3100
3SE2 120-1BV00-0AK0
5)
52.000.220
0.200
Overtravel plunger• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3) 5)• with increased corrosion protection
B 403SE2120-1AV00-0AF0 + 3SX3106
3SE2 120-1CV00-0AK0
5)
69.00
0.260
0.240
Roller plunger• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with 2 LED, 24 V, yellow & green4)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
C 403SE2120-1DV00-0AF0
3SE2120-1DV00-0AF1
3SE2120-1DV00-0AA3
3SE2120-1DV00-0AK0
99.00
108.00
92.00
76.00
0.250
0.250
0.255
0.250
Roller leverActuator made of moulded plastic
• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
– 40
3SE2120-1EV00-0AF0
3SE2120-1EV00-0AA3
3SE2120-1EV00-0AK0
88.00
85.00
65.00
0.215
0.200
0.210
Angular roller lever• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
– 40-
3SE2120-1FV00-0AA3
3SE2120-1FV00-0AK0
82.00
62.00
0.240
0.210
Roller crank• finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
• adjustable length, finely adjustablefrom 10° to 10°
• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
A 40
3SE2120-1GW00-0AF0
3SE2120-1GW00-0AA3
3SE2120-1GW00-0AK0
3SE2120-1UW00-0AF0
3SE2120-1UW00-0AA3
3SE2120-1UW00-0AK0
96.00 0.305
93.00 0.315
73.00
112.00
109.00
89.00
0.310
0.310
0.315
0.315
Rod actuatorfinely adjustable from 10° to 10°
D 40
-
3SE2120-1WW00-0AK0
-
3SE2120-1VW00-0AK0
• molded plastic rod
• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)
• with increased corrosion protection 84.00 0.315
• aluminum rod
• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with increased corrosion protection 85.00 0.320
Wobble spring – 40-
3SE2120-1RV00-0AL0
3SE2120-1RV00-0AK0
• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
78.00
83.00
0.200
0.200
Fork lever, latching• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with stainless steel roller• with increased corrosion protection
– 40-
3SE2120-1TV00-0AA3
3SE2120-1TV00-0AK0
220.00
119.00
0.355
0.345
Switch body with contact blockwithout operating head• with 1 LED, 24 V, yellow3)• with 2 LEDs, 24 V, yellow & green4)
– 40
3SE2120-1AV00-0AF0
3SE2120-1AV00-0AF1
69.00
78.00
0.185
0.200
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see Page 13/95).2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
3) The switch contacts have changed from their normal state.4) Green LED – There is power to the switch. Yellow LED – The switch
contacts have changed from their normal state.5) Two parts required. Order separately.
06IC13_089-094.qxd 12/1/05 12:23 AM Page 13/91
SiemIndus
13/92
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170, 3SE2 230
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/31, 13/29
Selection and ordering data
Switch Bodies with replaceable contact block without operating head
3SE2100, 3SE2120, 3SE2230 and 3SE3170 limit switches with field replaceable contact blocks may be provided as complete devices; or, separately as components; switch body, operating head and lever (if applicable).Switch Bodies are complete except for the operating head and lever (if applicable). The contact blocks are field replaceable and have a molded plastic housing in which the fixed contacts and the terminals are located.Operating Heads include the necessary hardware to mount to the selected Switch Body and may require an Operating Lever.
Plunger, Overtravel Plunger, Roller Plunger, Roller Lever, Angular Roller Lever and Wob-ble Spring operating heads are complete so only a Switch Body is required.Side rotary operating heads such as Roller Crank, Adjustable Roller Crank, Fork Lever and Rod Actuator require a side rotary Oper-ating Head and a suitable Lever. Therefore three parts are required for a complete switch; Switch Body, Operating Head, suitable Lever.
Operating heads for the 3SE2100, 3SE2120 and 3SE3170 series are interchangeable with each other and the various contact con-figurations. The same operating heads are also used in the 3SE2303 and 3SE2404 se-ries. These switches are not available in parts.Operating heads for the 3SE2230 series are interchangeable with the various contact configurations and may also require a lever (side rotary operating head).
Metal Housing40 mm 1) 56 mm1)
Molded Plastic Housing40 mm2)
3SE2 1203SE3 170
3SE2 100 3SE2 230
Contact Arrangement
1 NO + 1 NCSlow-action
1 NO + 1 NCSnap-action
1 NO + 1 NC,Slow-action
Make-Before-Break2 NC
Slow-action2 NO
Slow-action2 NC
Snap-action
Order No.
List Price $1 Unit
WeightApprox.
kg Order No.
List Price $1 Unit
WeightApprox.
kg Order No.
List Price $1 Unit
WeightApprox.
kg Order No.
List Price $1 Unit
WeightApprox.
kg Order No.
List Price $1 Unit
WeightApprox.
kg Order No.
List Price $1 Unit
WeightApprox.
kg
56 mm Wide Metal Housing with M20 x 1.5 Threaded Opening
3SE2100-0A 44.00 0.202 3SE2100-1A 44.00 0.203 3SE2100-3A 44.00 0.205 3SE2100-6A 44.00 0.200 3SE2100-7A 44.00 0.203 3SE2100-8AV00 44.00 0.175
40 mm Wide Metal Housing with M20 x 1.5 Threaded Opening
3SE2120-0A 44.00 0.175 3SE2120-1A 44.00 0.175 3SE2120-3A 44.00 0.175 3SE2120-6A 44.00 0.175 3SE2120-7A 44.00 0.190 3SE2120-8AV00 44.00 0.175
40 mm Wide Metal Housing with M20 x 1.5 Threaded Opening and One 24V LED
— — — 3SE2120-1AV00-0AF0 69.00 0.185 — — — — — — — — — — — —
40 mm Wide Metal Housing with M20 x 1.5 Threaded Opening and Two 24V LEDs
— — — 3SE2120-1AV00-0AF1 78.00 0.200 — — — — — — — — — — — —
40 mm Wide Metal Housing with M12 male Receptacle, 4-Poles
— — — 3SE2120-1AV00-0AC4 61.00 0.180 — — — — — — — — — — — —
40 mm Wide Metal Housing with M12 male Receptacle, 5-Poles
— — — 3SE2120-1AV00-0AC5 64.00 0.180 — — — — — — — — — — — —
40 mm Wide Metal Housing with 1/2” NPT Threaded Opening
3SE3170-0A 44.00 0.171 3SE3170-1A 44.00 0.169 3SE3170-3A 44.00 0.182 3SE3170-6A 44.00 0.174 3SE3170-7A 44.00 0.170 3SE3170-8AV00 44.00 0.170
40 mm Wide Plastic Housing with M20 x 1.5 Threaded Opening
3SE2230-0A 31.00 0.095 3SE2230-1A 31.00 0.100 3SE2230-3A 31.00 0.095 3SE2230-6A 31.00 0.095 3SE2230-7A 31.00 0.095 3SE2230-8AV00 31.00 0.130
Switch Body with Contact Block without Operating Head
1) Shown with operating head. See catalog page 13/95 and 13/96 for operating heads and levers.
Ho
usi
ng
Sty
le
2) Shown with operating head. See catalog page 13/83 for operating heads and levers.
06IC13_089-094.qxd 2/18/06 1:58 PM Page 13/92
13/93
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/32, 13/30
Selection and ordering data
3 contacts · Wide enclosure · Moving double break contacts · IP 67 degree of protection · M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/106 to 13/112.
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Wghtapprox.56 mm wide 2) with mit 3 slow-action
contactswith mit 3 slow-action contacts
with 3 slow-action make-before-break contacts
with 3 slow-actionmake-before-breakcontacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 12acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 003-0A
Identification number 21acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 003-1A
Identification number 12acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 003-2A
Identification No. 21 acc. to EN 50 013, switch block 3SE3 003-3A
Order No. Order No. Order No. Order No. List Price $
Actuator 1 ) 1 unit kg
Plunger
(3SX3100)
3SE2 303-0B 3SE2 303-1B 3SE2 303-2B 3SE2 303-3B 99.00 0.310
Overtravel plunger
(3SX3106)
3SE2 303-0C 3SE2 303-1C 3SE2 303-2C 3SE2 303-3C 94.00 0.332
Roller plunger
(3SX3107)
3SE2 303-0D 3SE2 303-1D 3SE2 303-2D 3SE2 303-3D 102.00 0.356
Roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic
(3SX3102)
3SE2 303-0E 3SE2 303-1E 3SE2 303-2E 3SE2 303-3E 91.00 0.314
Angular roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic
(3SX3104)
3SE2 303-0F 3SE2 303-1F 3SE2 303-2F 3SE2 303-3F 87.00 0.330
Roller crank
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
(3SX3211 + 3SX3212)
3SE2 303-0GW 3SE2 303-1GW 3SE2 303-2GW 3SE2 303-3GW 98.00 0.411
• adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
(3SX3211 + 3SX3213)
3SE2 303-0UW 3SE2 303-1UW 3SE2 303-2UW 3SE2 303-3UW 114.00 0.415
Rod actuator
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• Molded plastic rod
(3SX3211 + 3SX3215)
3SE2 303-0WW 3SE2 303-1WW 3SE2 303-2WW 3SE2 303-3WW 111.00 0.416
• Aluminum rod
(3SX3211 + 3SX3214)
3SE2 303-0VW 3SE2 303-1VW 3SE2 303-2VW 3SE2 303-3VW 111.00 0.425
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see page 13/95).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
06IC13_089-094.qxd 11/29/05 6:12 PM Page 13/93
13/94
3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/33, 13/31
Selection and ordering data
4 contacts · Wide enclosure · Moving double-break contacts · Degree of protection IP 67 · M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Pages 13/100 to 13/105.
3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches 3SE. position switches Wghtapprox.56 mm wide 2) with 4 snap-action contacts with 4 slow-action contacts with 4 slow-action make before-
break contacts
6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke 6 mm stroke
Identification number 22acc. to EN 50 013
Switch block 3SE3 000-1A Switch block 3SE3 010-1A
Identification number 22acc. to EN 50 013
Switch block 3SE3 000-0A Switch block 3SE3 010-0A
Identification number 22acc. to EN 50 013
Switch block 3SE3 000-3A Switch block 3SE3 010-3A
Order No.ListPrice $ Order No.
ListPrice $ Order No.
ListPrice $
Actuator 1) 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit kg
Plunger(3SX3100)
3SE2 404-1B 121.00 3SE2 404-0B 121.00 3SE2 404-2B 121.00 0.380
Overtravel plunger(3SX3106)
3SE2 404-1C 138.00 3SE2 404-0C 138.00 3SE2 404-2C 138.00 0.400
Roller plunger(3SX3107)
3SE2 404-1D 189.00 3SE2 404-0D 147.00 3SE2 404-2D 147.00 0.420
Roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3102)
3SE2 404-1E 136.00 3SE2 404-0E 136.00 3SE2 404-2E 136.00 0.381
Angular roller lever
Actuator made of molded plastic(3SX3104)
3SE2 404-1F 132.00 3SE2 404-0F 132.00 3SE2 404-2F 132.00 0.400
Roller crank
• finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
(3SX3211+3SX3212)
3SE2 404-1GW 181.00 3SE2 404-0GW 141.00 3SE2 404-2GW 141.00 0.480
• adjustable length, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
(3SX3211+3SX3213)
3SE2 404-1UW 161.00 3SE2 404-0UW 161.00 3SE2 404-2UW 161.00 0.479
Rod actuator
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
• Molded plasticrod
(3SX3211+3SX3215)
3SE2 404-1WW 155.00 3SE2 404-0WW 155.00 3SE2 404-2WW 155.00 0.490
• Aluminum rod(3SX3211+3SX3214)
3SE2 404-1VW 155.00 3SE2 404-0VW 155.00 3SE2 404-2VW 155.00 0.490
Fork lever(3SX3127+3SX3115)
3SE2 404-1T 193.00 – – 0.515
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K, and DIN VDE 0660 Part 200.
1) The actuator heads can be subsequently exchanged (see page 13/95).
2) For conduit thread adaptors see page 13/97.
06IC13_089-094.qxd 11/30/05 9:57 PM Page 13/94
13/95
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 303 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/34a, 13/32
Accessories
Actuator heads lamps
The actuator heads of the position switches can be subsequently exchanged for other variants.
1) Not for safety circuits
Actuators with mounting screws For position switches
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
3SE2 100-@@
3SE2 120-@@
3SE2 230-@@
3SE2 303-@@
3SE2 404-@@
3SE3 170-@@ 1 unit kg
Plunger
includes screws and gasket
– .B 3SX3 100 24.00 0.018
Overtravel plunger
includes screws and gasket
– .C 3SX3 106 43.00 0.056
Roller plungerincludes screws and gasket• standard roller• stainless steel roller
– .D
3SX3 1073SX3 263
51.0069.00
0.0820.080
Roller leverincludes screws and gasket• standard roller• stainless steel roller
– .E
3SX3 1023SX3 275
28.0033.00
0.0340.050
Angular roller leverincludes screws and gasket• standard roller• stainless steel roller
– .F
3SX3 1043SX3 276
35.0030.00
0.0430.050
Wobble spring 1)
(includes screws and gasket)– .R
• standard, spring 50 mm,plastic rod 50 mm
• length 73 mm, spring 23.5 mm,stainless steel rod 10 mm
• length 113 mm, spring 23.5 mm,stainless steel rod 50 mm
• length 139.5 mm, spring 50 mm,plastic rod 50 mmwith increased corrosion protection
• length 139.5 mm, spring 50 mm,stainless steel rod 50 mm
• length 239.5 mm, spring 150 mm,plastic rod 50 mm
• length 239.5 mm, spring 150 mm,stainless steel rod 50 mm
3SX3 126
3SX3 282
3SX3 285
3SX3 284
3SX3 281
3SX3 283
3SX3 311
59.00
66.00
66.00
85.00
77.00
66.00
82.00
0.049
0.020
0.020
0.050
0.060
0.070
0.080
3SX3 126
06IC13_095-100.qxd 11/29/05 7:33 PM Page 13/95
13/96
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 303 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/34b, 13/33
Accessories
Actuators with mounting screws For position switches Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
3SE2 100-@@
3SE2 120-@@
3SE2 303-@@
3SE2 404-@@
3SE3 170-@@ 1 unit kg
Roller crank operating heads(without lever, includes screws & gasket)
• standard momentary (spring return),left and right operation
• momentary (spring return),left and/or right operation
• fork lever, maintained
-.GW, -.U, -.V, -.W
-.GW, -.U, -.V, -.W
-1T
3SX3 211
3SX3 307
3SX3 127
41.00
48.00
65.00
0.112
0.085
0.131
Roller crank levers(operating head not included)
• standard, plastic roller, 19 mm dia.
• stanless steel roller, 19 mm dia.
• plastic roller, 30 mm dia.
• plastic roller, 50 mm dia.
• rubber roller, 50 mm dia.
– .GW
3SX3 212
3SX3 265
3SX3 278
3SX3 301
3SX3 280
9.00
21.75
17.00
16.00
18.00
0.020
0.025
0.020
0.020
0.020
Adjustable length roller crank(operating head not included)
• levers with clamp
• standard, plastic roller, 19 mm dia.
• stanless steel roller, 19 mm dia.
• plastic roller, 30 mm dia.
• rubber roller, 50 mm dia.
• levers without clamp
• rubber roller, 50 mm dia.
– .UW
3SX3 213
3SX3 268
3SX3 302
3SX3 304
3SY3 024
24.00
37.00
30.00
32.00
8.00
0.024
0.030
0.025
0.020
0.036
Fork lever(operating head not included)
• standard, plastic rollers, 19 mm dia.
• stainless steel rollers, 19 mm dia.
-1T
3SX3 115
3SX3 266
35.00
61.00
0.032
0.050
Rod actuator(operating head not included)
• with support
• standard, plastic rod
• aluminum rod
• without support
• standard, plastic rod
• aluminum rod
– .WW
– .VW
– .WW
– .VW
3SX3 215
3SX3 214
3SX3 000
3SX3 001
20.00
20.00
3.00
3.00
0.031
0.032
0.008
0.016
3SX3 211
3SX3 212
3SX3 213
3SX3 115
3SX3 215
06IC13_095-100.qxd 11/30/05 9:58 PM Page 13/96
13/97
Accessories
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/35, 13/34
Connectorsfor fast installation and replacement of position and interlock switches
Design Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
Preferred type 1 unit kg
Cable connectors for 3SE2 (with M20 x 1.5)3SY3 131 3SY3 123 Receptacle (6-poles + ground)
250V max., 10Afor M20 x 1.5
with 0.75 mm2 connecting leads, for 3SX3 123 cable plug, molded plastic, IP 65 degree of protection
Plug 1)Molded plastic enclosure, degree of protection IP 65, screw terminals
3SY3 131
3SY3 123
53.00
57.40
0.030
0.064
3SY3 131 3SY3 123 Receptacle (4-pole), M 12 for M20 x 1.5 250V max., 4A
for 3RX1 505 coupling plug, with 0.75 mm2 connecting lead, IP 67 degree of protection
3SY3 127 36.00 0.008
3SY3 128 Receptacle (5-pole), M 12 for M20 x 1.5 125V max., 4Afor 3RX1584
with 0.25 mm2 connecting lead, IP 67 degree of protection
3SY3 128 36.00 0.006
Plug (4-pole), M 12
with terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled
3RX1 505 0.016
Plug (5-pole), M 12
with terminal compartment, can be pre-assembled
3RX1 584 0.016
5VF1182 Plastic wire gland
PG 13.5 (6 mm long, with seal)
PG 11 (6 mm long, with seal)
5VF1 182
5VF1 181
5.00
5.00
Adaptors for 3SE. (with M 16)TPN ”2/1 ot 5.1 x 61M latem 3SX1997 8.40 0.022
Adaptors for 3SE2 (with M 20)plastic M20 x 1.5 wire gland 3SB3901-0CK 5.00 0.011
metal M20 x 1.5 to 1/2” NPT 3SX1998 8.60 0.022
plastic M20 x 1.5 to 1/2” NPT 3SX9918 7.00 0.012
Adaptors for 3SE. (with M 25)metal M 25 x 1.5 to 1/2” NPT 3SX1999 8.75 0.022
1) For wiring, a crimping tool is necessary, max. conductor size 1 mm2.
3SX1997
3SX9918
3SX1998 3SX9918
3SX1999
3RX1 5053RX1 584
3SX9918
06IC13_095-100.qxd 11/30/05 9:58 PM Page 13/97
SiemIndus
13/98
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 303 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/36, 13/35
Accessories and spare parts
Design Fig. For position switches
Order No. ListPrice $
Weightapprox.
Pack
1 unit kg Units
Spare parts for 3SE. 1.0, 3SE. 230 and 3SE. 4041 2 Switch blocks with 2 contacts
with moving double-break contacts
• with snap-action contacts
- 1 NO + 1 NC 1 3SE. 1.0-1.,3SE2 230-1.,3SE2 404-1.
3SE3 000-1A 27.00 0.032
,.8-0.1 .ES31CN 2-3SE2 230-8.,3SE2 404-8.
3SE3 000-8AV00 27.00 0.020
• with slow-action contacts
- 1 NO + 1 NC 2 3SE. 1.0-0., 3SE. 230-0., 3SE. 404-0.
3SE3 000-0A 27.00 0.031
,.6-0.1.ES3CN 2-3SE. 230-6.
3SE3 000-6A 27.00 0.029
,.7-0.1.ES3ON 2-3SE. 230-7.
3SE3 000-7A 27.00 0.029
• with slow-action make-before-break contacts
- 1 NO + 1 NC 2 3SE. 1.0-3., 3SE. 230-3., 3SE. 404-2.
3SE3 000-3A 27.00 0.031
3 4 Switch blocks with repeat plunger with 2 contacts - 1 NO + 1 NC
for position switches with 4 contacts with moving double-break contacts
• with snap-action contacts 3 3SE. 404-1. 3SE3 010-1A 37.00 0.033
• with slow-action contacts 4 3SE. 404-0. 3SE3 010-0A 37.00 0.032
• with slow-action make-before-break contacts
4 3SE. 404-2. 3SE3 010-3A 29.00 0.034
Spare parts for 3SE. 3035 Switch blocks with 3 contacts
with moving double-break contacts
• with slow-action contacts
- 1 NO + 2 NC 5 3SE. 303-0. 3SE3 003-0A 53.00 0.047
- 2 NO + 1 NC 5 3SE. 303-1. 3SE3 003-1A 53.00 0.047
• with slow-action make-before-break contacts
- 1 NO + 2 NC 5 3SE. 303-2. 3SE3 003-2A 41.00 0.047
- 2 NO + 1 NC 5 3SE. 303-3. 3SE3 003-3A 41.00 0.063
06IC13_095-100.qxd 11/29/05 6:18 PM Page 13/98
13/99
3SE3 020 / 3SE3 023Open type
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/37, 13/36
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Moving double break contacts · Degree of protection: Terminals IP 20, switching chamber IP 40Tandem arrangement (2 × 2 contacts) is possible when 3SY3 121 adapter is used (see accessories below).
For operation, operating speed and travel, see Page 13/112.
Internal circuit diagram
Order No. List Price $
Weightapprox.
Nominal travel and related terminals Minimum force required along plunger axis
Term. design. acc. to EN 50 013
0-line
***
commencement of plunger travelcontact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Preferred type 1 unit kg along plunger axis perpend. to plunger axis α = 30°
Snap-action contacts, 6 mm stroke buH mm6 ,regnulp gnol mm12 htiwA1-020 3ES3
3SE3 020-1A N 6630.0
Slow-action contacts, 6 mm stroke buH mm6 ,regnulp gnol mm 12 htiwA0-020 3ES3
3SE3 020-0A N 8630.0
Slow-action make-before-break contacts, 6 mm strokeregnulp gnol mm 12 htiwA3-020 ES3
3SY3 121
3SE3 020-3A N 8630.0
Intermediate piecefor tandem arrangement of 2-pole open-type position switches
3SY3 121 0.001
3 contacts · Moving double break contacts · Degree of protection: Terminals IP 20, switching chamber IP 40
Slow-action contacts, 6 mm stroke ,regnulp taeper dna regnulp mm 12 htiwA0-320 3ES3
for tandem arrangement, 6mm Hub11 N
3SE3 023-0A 0.051
3SE3 023-1A N 31150.0
Slow-action make-before-break contacts, 6 mm stroke ,regnulp taeper dna regnulp mm 12 htiw A2-320 3ES3
for tandem arrangement, 6mm Hub11 N
3SE3 023-2A 0.051
3SE3 023-3A N 31850.0
Safety function according to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
25.00
25.00
25.00
2.00
39.00
39.00
39.00
39.00
06IC13_095-100.qxd 2/18/06 2:00 PM Page 13/99
13/100
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/38, 13/37
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 contacts · Standard and wide enclosure
Bars, cams, stops, etc. are used as actuating devices. The shape of the actuating device must pro-vide the given angles for the leading and trailing edges.
For operation from the side, sparingly greased steel, POM (polyoxymethylene or polyace-tal) or PA (polyamide) should be used as cam and bar material.
Operating speed along plunger axis
The actuating speed in the case of position switches with slow-action contacts is not permitted
to go lower than 15 mm/s for DC and 1 mm/s for AC. Position switches with snap-action con-tacts should be used when the speeds are lower.
3SE2 404 position switches · 4 contacts · Wide enclosure
The data for operation, operat-ing speed, travel and angle of operation is the same as for the
position switches with 2 switch blocks.
Two switch blocks with 2 con-tacts are used for position switches with 4 contacts.
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax0-lineH→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedref. line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Plunger along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis along plunger axis
3SE2 100–.B, 3SE. 1@0–.B,3SE2 404–.B
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 12 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC with make-before-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00, 3SE3 010–1AV00Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_095-100.qxd 11/1/05 3:05 PM Page 13/100
13/101
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 230 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/39, 13/38
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 or 4 contacts · Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax0-lineH→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedref. line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Overtravel plunger, Type B along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis along plunger axis
3SE2 100–.C, 3SE. 1@0–.C,3SE2 230–.C, 3SE2 404–.C
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 32 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_101-106.qxd 11/1/05 11:46 AM Page 13/101
SiemIndus
13/102
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 230 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/40, 13/39
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 or 4 contacts · Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax0-lineH→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max.operating speedref. line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller plunger, type C along plunger axis perp sixa regnulp gnolasixa regnulp ot ralucidne
3SE2 100–.D, 3SE. 1@0–.D, 3SE2 230–.D, 3SE2 404–.D
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
vmax. = 1 m/s (3SE3 230–1D), vmax. = 0.5 m/s (3SE3 1.0–1D),
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 32 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00,3SE3 010–1AV00,Ident. No. 02
Fork lever Deflection in direction of rotation
3SE2 100–1T, 3SE. 1@0–1T, 3SE2 404–1T
lateral actuation
vmax. = 2 m/sMinimum force required in direction of operation: 30 N
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00,3SE3 010–1AV00,Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_101-106.qxd 11/1/05 3:23 PM Page 13/102
13/103
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 230 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/41, 13/40
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 or 4 contacts · Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax0-lineH
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041approach anglemax. operating speedref. line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller lever perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 100–.E, 3SE. 1@0–.E, 3SE2 230–.E, 3SE2 404–.E
vmax. = 2.5 m/s
vmax. = 1 m/s, max = 30°, max = 45°Minimum force required in direction of operation: 12 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-bef.-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
Angular roller lever along plunger axis along plunger axis
3SE2 100–.F, 3SE. 1@0–.F, 3SE2 230–.F, 3SE2 404–.F
vmax. = 2.5 m/s
vmax. = 1 m/s, max = 30°, max = 45°Minimum force required in direction of operation: 12 N
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
Ident. No. 02
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
22
NSC00164
S=20±2
11-120
mm21-22
16
20
Standard
Standard
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_101-106.qxd 2/3/06 6:58 PM Page 13/103
SiemIndus
13/104
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 230 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/42, 13/41
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 or 4 contacts · Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
αβvmax0-lineSH→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041approach angletrailing anglemax. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
ref. line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller crank, type A perpendicular to pl ucidneprepsixa regnu lar to plunger axis
repositionable and finely adjustable from 10° to 10°3SE2 100–.GW, 3SE. 1@0–.GW, 3SE2 230–.GW, 3SE2 404–.GW
vmax. = 3 m/sMinimum torque required in direction of operation: 25 NcmIn special designs, contacts can only be operated from right or left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left.
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-bef.-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00,3SE3 010–1AV00, Ident. No. 02
Roller crank, adjustable length Deflection in direction of rotation Deflection in direction of rotation
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°3SE2 100–.UW, 3SE. 1@0–.UW, 3SE2 230–.U, 3SE2 404–.UW
vmax. = 1 m/s, αmax = 30°, βmax = 30°Minimum torque required in direction of operation: 25 NcmContact operation either from right or left or from right and left.
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-bef.-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00,3SE3 010–1AV00, Ident. No. 02
1) Max. operating angle 70°.
Standard
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
Standard
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
06IC13_101-106.qxd 2/3/06 6:58 PM Page 13/104
13/105
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170 / 3SE2 230 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/43, 13/42
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
2 or 4 contacts · Standard and wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
vmax0-line→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedref. line acc. to EN 50 041direction of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-line
***
ref. line acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Rod actuator noitator fo noitcerid ninoitator fo noitcerid ni
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 100–.WW, 3SE. 1@0–.WW, 3SE2 230–.W, 3SE2 404–.WW
3SE2 100–.VW, 3SE. 1@0–.VW, 3SE2 230–.V, 3SE2 404–.VW
vmax. = 3 m/s
Minimum torque required in direction of operation: 25 Ncm
In special designs, contacts can only be operated from right or left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left.
Slow-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–0A, 3SE3 010–0A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–6A, Ident. No. 02
1 NO + 1 NC With make-before-break
3SE3 000–3A, 3SE3 010–3A, Ident. No. 11
2 NO
3SE3 000–7A, Ident. No. 20
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00,3SE3 010–1AV00, Ident. No. 02
Spring rod Deflection of spring rod
3SE2 100–1R, 3SE. 1@0–1R,3SE2 230–.R
vmax. = 1 m/s, approachable from all sides
Minimum force required in direction of operation: 12 N
with lateral deflection at the tip: 2.5 N
Snap-action contacts
1 NC + 1 NO
3SE3 000–1A, 3SE3 010–1A, Ident. No. 11
2 NC
3SE3 000–1AV00,3SE3 010–1AV00, Ident. No. 02
1) Max. operating angle 70°.
Standard
17 25
18 26
41000C
SN
Standard
06IC13_101-106.qxd 11/1/05 3:06 PM Page 13/105
13/106
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/45, 13/43
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of operationvmax
0-lineH
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Plunger Slow-action contacts along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 303–.B
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
16 N
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
18 N
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
16 N
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
18 N
06IC13_101-106.qxd 10/31/05 3:30 PM Page 13/106
13/107
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/46, 13/44
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of operationvmax
0-lineH
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Overtravel plunger Slow-action contacts along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 303–.C
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
vmax. = 0.5 m/s
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
35 N
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
37 N
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
35 N
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
37 N
06IC13_107-114.qxd 10/31/05 3:35 PM Page 13/107
13/108
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/45, 13/45
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of operationvmax
0-lineH
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
***
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openoperating point on returnpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller plunger Slow-action contacts along plunger axis perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 303–.D
vmax. = 1.5 m/s
vmax. = 1 m/s
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
35 N
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
37 N
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
35 N
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
37 N
06IC13_107-114.qxd 10/31/05 3:36 PM Page 13/108
13/109
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/46, 13/46
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of operation
vmax0-lineH
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041approach angletrailing angleapproach anglemax. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
**
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller lever Slow-action contacts perpendicular to plunger axis
3SE2 303–.E
For operation perpendicular to plunger axis :vmax. = 1 m/s at max = 30°vmax. = 2.5 m/s at max = 45°
max = 45°
For operation along plunger axis: vmax. = 1.5 m/s
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
15 N
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
17 N
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
15 N
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
17 N
Angular roller lever Slow-action contacts along plunger axis
3SE2 303–.F
For operation along plunger axis:vmax. = 1 m/s at max = 30°vmax. = 2.5 m/s at max = 45°vmax. = 2.5 m/s at max = 45°
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
15 N
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
17 N
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
15 N
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
17 N
06IC13_107-114.qxd 10/31/05 3:37 PM Page 13/109
13/110
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/49, 13/47
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
1) Max. operating angle 70°.Max. deflection for adjustment purposes 90°.
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of rotationvmax
0-lineH→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041travel differencedirection of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
**
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller crank Slow-action contacts perpendicular to plunger axis
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 303–.GW–ZA31
vmax. = 3 m/s
In special designs contacts can only be operated from right or left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left.
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
25 Ncm
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
06IC13_107-114.qxd 10/31/05 3:38 PM Page 13/110
13/111
3SE2 303Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/50, 13/48
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
1) Max. operating angle 70°.
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of rotationα
βvmax0-line→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041approach angletrailing anglemax. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041direction of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
**
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Roller crank, adjustable length Slow-action contacts perpendicular to plunger axis
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 303–.UW
vmax. = 3 m/s, αmax = 30°, βmax = 30°
In special designs contacts can only be operated from right or left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left.
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
25 Ncm
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
06IC13_107-114.qxd 10/31/05 3:38 PM Page 13/111
13/112
3SE2 303 / 3SE3 02.Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/51, 13/49
Operation, operating speed and travel or angle of actuators
3 contacts · Wide enclosure
3SE3 020 and 3SE3 023 open-type position switches 2 and 3 contacts · Moving double break contacts · Degree of protection: Terminals IP 20, switching chamber IP 40
Operation by a bar Switch blocks Nominal traveland related terminals
Minimum force required in direction of rotationvmax
0-line→
operating pt acc. to EN 50 041max. operating speedreference line acc. to EN 50 041direction of operation
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50 013
0-lineS
**
reference line acc. to EN 50 041travel acc. to EN 50 041contact closedcontact openpositive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
Rod actuator Slow-action contacts Deflection in direction of rotation
finely adjustable from 10° to 10°
3SE2 303–.WW, 3SE2 303–.VW
vmax. = 3 m/s
In special designs contacts can only be operated from right or left. By twisting the plunger from the right and left.
1 NO + 2 NC
Ident. No. 12
25 Ncm
2 NO + 1 NC
Ident. No. 21
1 NO + 2 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 12
2 NO + 1 NCmake-before-break
Ident. No. 21
1) Max. operating angle 70°. Max. deflection for adjustment purposes 90°.
Operation by a bar Type A ≥mm
A** ≤mm
PlungerActuators can be in the form of a bar, cam, stop etc.
For operation perpendicular to plunger axis:αmax = 30°, vmax = 0.5 m/sβmax = 30°
For operation perpendicular plunger axis:vmax = 1.5 m/s
3SE3 020-0A 15 –
3SE3 020-1A 15 17.5
3SE3 020-3A 15 –
A Actuating bar spacing = distance from center, fixing hole up to lower edge of contact bar
3SE3 023-0A 15 –
3SE3 023-1A 15 –
3SE3 023-2A 15 –
A** Actuating bar distance, to guarantee positive opening of the snap-action contacts acc. to DIN VDE 0113.
3SE3 023-3A 15 –
06IC13_107-114.qxd 11/1/05 2:47 PM Page 13/112
13/113
3SE2 100 to 3SE3 170Metal enclosure, 40 and 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/52, 13/50
Dimension drawings
3SE2 1.0, 3SE3 1.03SE. 1@0narrow enclosure, 2 contacts, with plunger
3SE2 100wide enclosure, 2 contacts, with plunger
Actuators for 3SE2 1.0, 3SE3 1.0 position switchesrevel relloRC mroF ,regnulp relloRB mroF ,regnulp levartrevO
* Lever in final position
Angular roller lever
* Lever in final position
3SX3 212 roller crank for3SX3 211 actuator heads
Fork lever
Roller crank, adjustable length Rod actuator, adjustable length, Form D Wobble spring
9
06IC13_107-114.qxd 2/10/06 4:15 PM Page 13/113
13/114
3SE2 303 / 3SE2 404Metal enclosure, 56 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/54, 13/51
Dimension drawings
3SE2 303wide enclosure, 3 contacts
3SE2 404wide enclosure, 4 contacts
Open-type3SE3 020-.A 3SE3 023-.A
06IC13_107-114.qxd 10/31/05 3:39 PM Page 13/114
13/115
3SE3 160 / 3SE3 180Metal enclosure with molded cable, 30 and 40 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/55, 13/66
OverviewIn harsh industrial environments and in installations with limited space, the small 3SE3 160 and 3SE3 180 compact switches are ideal. The switches are already equipped with a molded cable of 2 m in length and can therefore be installed in the smallest spaces.
Both the housing and the actua-tor head are made of metal and therefore meet the high IP 67 de-gree of protection. Various actu-ator heads, in the form of roller plungers, overtravel plungers and roller cranks, are available.
They can be fitted alternatively with snap-action contacts. 1 NO + 1 NC. The NC contact complies with the requirements for positive opening according to IEC 60 947-5-1.The 3SE3 1 position switch with molded cable is available in dif-ferent sizes:
• The 3SE3 180 series complies with the EU standard and fea-tures a 30 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a spacing of 20 mm.
• The 3SE3 160 series meets the requirements of the US market and features a 40 mm wide en-closure with drilled holes at a spacing of 25 mm.
Technical data
Selection and ordering data
2 contacts · Degree of protection IP 67
Switch blocks and travel
Switching frequency noitcetorp fo eergeDnim/03 IP 67Rated insulation voltage Ui gninepo tcatnoCV 005 2 x 1.25 mmPollution degree deeps gnitarepO3 ssalC
up to 80% operating distanceConventional thermal current Ith .C.-0.1 3ES3•A 01 ≤ 1 m/sAmbient temperature .D.-0.1 3ES3•C° 58+ ot 03– Vertical ≤ 1 m/sMechanical endurance 10 × 106 operations Lateral ≤ 0.5 m/sElectrical endurance .G.-0.1 3ES3•snoitarepo 000005 ≤ 1.5 m/sConnecting cable (2 m) PVC-5 x 0.75 mm² (18 AWG);
br-bl: S, bk-bk: NC, ye/gy: 0 V
Actuator 3SE3 1 position switches
with 2 snap-action contacts
Weight Approx.
3SE3 180-1C
6 mm stroke
Enclos.width
Ident. No. 11 acc. to EN 50 013
3SE3 180-1D Order No. List Price $mm 1 unit kg
Overtravel plunger 30 3SE3 180-1C 36.00 0.31640 3SE3 160-1C 73.00 0.332
• with M 12 thread fixing 30 3SE3 180-1CJ 42.00 0.33540 3SE3 160-1CJ 75.00 0.351
3SE3 160-1G Roller plunger 30 3SE3 180-1D 50.00 0.32340 3SE3 160-1D 89.00 0.348
• with M 12 thread fixing 30 3SE3 180-1DJ 55.00 0.33440 3SE3 160-1DJ 97.00 0.364
Roller crank 30 3SE3 180-1G 37.00 0.36640 3SE3 160-1G 73.00 0.395
Positive opening acc. to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K.
Switch block Nominal travel
Internal circuit diagramTerminal designationacc. to EN 50 013
0-line**
reference line acc. to EN 50 041positive opening to IEC 60 947-5-1-3
contact closedcontact open
G1–0.1 3ES3.D1– ,.C1–0.1 3ES3CN 1 + ON 1 stcatnoc noitca-panSBK = blackBN = brownBU = blueGN/YE = green/yellowNSC0_00265c
2,5 **4 5 mm
1,50
100%BKBNBKBN
-BK-BU-BK-BU
NSC0_00266c
**50° 75°
12°
0° 20°BKBNBKBN
-BK-BU-BK-BU
100%
06IC13_115-118.qxd 2/18/06 2:01 PM Page 13/115
SiemIndus
13/116
3SE3 160 / 3SE3 180Metal enclosure with molded cable, 30 and 40 mm width
3SE International Limit SwitchesPosition Switches
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/65, 13/67
06IC13_115-118.qxd 2/3/06 7:04 PM Page 13/116
13/117
Non-safetyModular, plug-in metal housing
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesGeneral Information
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/145, 13/52
Inc.talog
Features
elbac deriw-erPni-gulp raludoM
Features• UL Listed, CSA Certified.• All Metal Captive Screws.• Keyed, Four-Directional Head.• Steel-Reinforced Diaphragm
Seal Between Operational Head And Switch Body.
• Permanent Instructions for Adjusting Operational Head.
• Modular, Plug-In Housing 1.Heavy-Duty, Bifurcated,
Plug-In Prongs.2.Ample Receptacle Wiring
Space with 1/2 - NPT threaded conduit opening.
3.Stepped Terminals On Single Pole; Deep Center Trough On Double Pole.
• NEMA Type 6P Submersible1.Completely Sealed With
Epoxy.2.STOOW-A Cable or
Prewired Receptacle With Pin Connector.
DesignModular Plug-In HousingThese heavy duty plug-in limit switches may be provided as complete devices using a composite catalog number; or, separately as components; operating head, plug-in module and base receptacle.Example:Complete Switch:3SE03-AR1
Single Pole, Double Throw contacts with Side Rotary, Momentary Head
Components3SE03-SA
Single Pole, Double Throw Plug-in Module
3SE03-DR1Side Rotary Head, Momentary
3SE03-RAStandard, Single Pole Receptacle, 1 NO + 1 NC
Since components may be interchanged, operating heads, plug-in modules and receptacles may be combined to satisfy most of your everyday limit switch requirements. This leads to less inventory with greater flexibility.Operating heads include side rotary; plain and roller plunger; and, wobble. A variety of levers are available.The die-cast housing has an epoxy finish to protect against corrosion. All screws on the module and head are captive.
NEMA Type 6P SubmersibleThese heavy duty prewired, factory sealed switches meet the demanding enclosure requirements of UL (NEMA) Type 3, 4, 4X, 6P, 11, 12, and 13. They are intended for wet environments where the integrity of the threaded conduit and switch body seals must be assured.The switch body cavity including threaded conduit entry is completely sealed with epoxy. An 8 foot, 5 or 9 conductor STOOW-A cable; or 5 or 9 pin prewired receptacle with pin connector is provided as standard.Switches are provided as complete devices using composite catalog numbers; or, separately as components; operating head and switch body.UL (NEMA) Type 6P switches are designed to provide a degree of protection against the entry of water during prolonged submersion at limited depths (tested with a 6 foot head of water for 24 hours).Both the Modular Plug-in and the (NEMA) Type 6P Submersible styles provide 60 Amp make and 6 Amp break—120V AC and 10 Amp continuous current for 120, 240, 480 and 600V AC. The circuit contact configuration depends on the device selected and the application criteria.Switches are available with momentary or maintained operating heads; and, single pole, double pole or center neutral (modular, plug-in only) contact configurations.3SE03 limit switches offer a new standard of reliability and quality in automatic control circuits under heavy duty applications.
Plug-in module andreceptacle are keyed.
Pre-wired receptacle with pin connector
06IC13_115-118.qxd 10/31/05 3:42 PM Page 13/117
13/118
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesSpecifications
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/152, 13/59
Technical data
Operating temperature 1) 2)
1) Temperature ranges below +32°F (0°C) are based on absence of freezing moisture or water.
2) For temperature rating of specific switch, refer to page 13/122, Operating Heads.
Type Modular, Plug-in and NEMA Type 6P Submersible
Mechanical life
Electrical life
Side rotary: 13 x 106 make-break operations minimumAll others: 10 x 106 make-break operations minimumSingle Pole: 1 x 106 operations typical at full loadDouble Pole: 1 x 105 operations typical at full load
Switching frequencyOperating point accuracy
Cable entry
8 x 103 make-break operations per hour (maximum)Side operated: 0.0012 in. (modular, plug-in housing)Side rotary: 0.0014 in. (modular plug-in). Top operated: 0.003 in. (modular, plug-in housing)1/2 in.-NPT, Prewired Cable or Prewired Receptacle with Pin Connector
Ambient temperature
Degree of protection
Without Cable: –10° to +121°C, 14° to 250°FWith Cable: –10° to +105°C, 14° to 221°FNEMA Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 11, 13; IP67
Conductor size
MountingTightening Torque
22–12 AWG (modular, plug-in housing)5 or 9 conductor, 16 AWG yellow jacketed type STOOW-A cable STOOW-A (prewired cable)5 or 9 pin, 0.87 in. (22 mm) diameter receptacle (prewired receptacle with pin connector)Any positionSwitch body screws: 25–30 lb-in.Operating head screws: 14–18 lb-in.
NEMA ratingDC,NEMA R300
AC,NEMA A600
Maximum current at 125V 250V 120V 240V 480V 600V
MakeBreak
Max. volt-ampereMakeBreak
0.22A0.22A
28VA28VA
0.11A0.11A
28VA28VA
60A6A
7200VA720VA
30A3A
7200VA720VA
15A1.5A
7200VA720VA
12A1.2A
7200VA720VA
Rated thermal currentRated operating voltage
DC, 1ADC, 300V
AC, 10AAC, 600V
Temperature rating
Operation Temperature range
Type Return Without cable With cable
1 Side rotaryMomentary CW onlyor CCW only
10°F to 250°F-12°C to 121°C
10°F to 221°F-12°C to 105°C
2
Center neutralSide rotarySide plungerTwo-sided plungerRoller side plunger
Momentary CW or CCWMaintainedMomentaryMaintainedMomentary
14°F to 200°F-10°C to 94°C
14°F to 200°F-10°C to 94°C
3Top plungerTop roller plungerWobble head
MomentaryMomentaryMomentary
14°F to 250°F-10°C to 121°C
14°F to 221°F-10°C to 105°C
06IC13_115-118.qxd 10/31/05 3:42 PM Page 13/118
Complete switches without lever - threaded cable entry:
5° pretravel to operate contacts. 15° pretravel to operate contacts.
Plug-In module type
Standard single pole1 NO + 1 NC(3SE03-SA)
Standard double pole2 NO + 2 NC(3SE03-SB)
Receptacle typesurface mount
Single pole(3SE03-RA)
Double pole(3SE03-RB)
Operating head type
Composite catalog number consisting of head, module and receptacle
Catalog NumberList Price $ 1 unit Catalog Number
List Price $ 1 unit
Side rotaryCW and CCW operation convertible to CW only or CCW only
Standard momentary (3SE03-DR1)
3SE03-AR1 111.00 3SE03-BR1 135.00
Standard maintained (3SE03-DM1)
3SE03-AM1 137.00 3SE03-BM1 161.00
Low torqued momentary (3SE03-DL1)
3SE03-AL1 124.00 3SE03-BL1 148.00
Plain side plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DS1)
3SE03-AS1 129.00 3SE03-BS1 153.00
Roller side plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DS3)
3SE03-AS3 143.00 3SE03-BS3 167.00
Two-sided plunger
Maintained(3SE03-DH1)
3SE03-AH1 149.00 3SE03-BH1 172.00
Plain top plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DT1)
3SE03-AT1 122.00 3SE03-BT1 145.00
Roller top plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DT3)
3SE03-AT3 136.00 3SE03-BT3 160.00
Wobble head (without lever)
Momentary(3SE03-DW1)
3SE03-AW1 117.00 3SE03-BW1 141.00
Plug-In module type
Center neutralDouble pole2 NO + 2 NC(3SE03-SN)
Receptacle typesurface mount
Center neutral(3SE03-RB)
Composite catalog numberconsisting of head, module and receptacle
Operating head type Catalog NumberList Price $ 1 unit
Side rotary (momentary)
CenterNeutral
(3SE03-DN1)(3SE03-DN2)
3SE03-NN13SE03-NN2
144.00144.00
CW CCW
13/119
Non-safetyModular, plug-in metal housing
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesSelection
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/146, 13/53
06IC13_119-124.qxd 11/29/05 6:56 PM Page 13/119
SiemIndus
13/120
Non-safetyNEMA type 6P submersible, prewired receptacle
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesSelection
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Complete switches without lever - prewired cable:
Switch body type—8 foot cable
Single pole1 NO + 1 NC(3SE03-SA6P)
Cable color code1 - White2 - Black3 - Red4 - Orange5 - Green
Double pole2 NO + 2 NC(3SE03-SB6P)
Cable color code1 - White 6 - Pink2 - Black 7 - Yellow3 - Red 8 - Blue4 - Orange 9 - Green5 - Brown
Operating head type
Composite catalog number consisting of head and switch body
Catalog NumberList Price $ 1 unit Catalog Number
List Price $ 1 unit
Side rotaryCW and CCW operation convertible to CW only or CCW only
Standard momentary (3SE03-DR1)
3SE03-AR16P 145.00 3SE03-BR16P 213.00
Standard maintained (3SE03-DM1)
3SE03-AM16P 171.00 3SE03-BM16P 239.00
Low torqued momentary (3SE03-DL1)
3SE03-AL16P 158.00 3SE03-BL16P 226.00
Plain side plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DS1)
3SE03-AS16P 163.00 3SE03-BS16P 231.00
Roller side plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DS3)
3SE03-AS36P 177.00 3SE03-BS36P 245.00
Two-sided plunger
Maintained(3SE03-DH1)
3SE03-AH16P 183.00 Not available
Plain top plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DT1)
3SE03-AT16P 155.00 3SE03-BT16P 223.00
Roller top plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DT3)
3SE03-AT36P 170.00 3SE03-BT36P 238.00
Wobble head (without lever)
Momentary(3SE03-DW1)
3SE03-AW16P 151.00 3SE03-BW16P 219.00
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/147, 13/54
06IC13_119-124.qxd 11/30/05 10:01 PM Page 13/120
13/121
Non-safetyNEMA type 6P submersible, prewired receptacle
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesSelection
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Complete switches without lever - prewired receptacle with pin connector:
Switch Body Type—prewired receptacle with pin connector
Single pole1 NO + 1 NC(3SE03-SA6PC)
Double pole2 NO + 2 NC(3SE03-SB6PC)
Operating head type
Composite catalog number consisting of head and switch body
Catalog NumberList Price $1 unit Catalog Number
List Price $1 unit
Side rotaryCW and CCW operation convertible to CW only or CCW only
Standard momentary (3SE03-DR1)
3SE03-AR16PC 167.00 3SE03-BR16PC 253.00
Standard maintained (3SE03-DM1)
3SE03-AM16PC 193.00 3SE03-BM16PC 279.00
Low torqued momentary (3SE03-DL1)
3SE03-AL16PC 179.00 3SE03-BL16PC 265.00
Plain side plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DS1)
3SE03-AS16PC 185.00 3SE03-BS16PC 271.00
Roller side plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DS3)
3SE03-AS36PC 198.00 3SE03-BS36PC 284.00
Two-sided plunger
Maintained(3SE03-DH1)
3SE03-AH16PC 204.00 Not available
Plain top plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DT1)
3SE03-AT16PC 177.00 3SE03-BT16PC 263.00
Roller top plunger
Momentary(3SE03-DT3)
3SE03-AT36PC 192.00 3SE03-BT36PC 277.00
Wobble head (without lever)
Momentary(3SE03-DW1)
3SE03-AW16PC 172.00 3SE03-BW16PC 258.00
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/148, 13/55
06IC13_119-124.qxd 11/29/05 6:57 PM Page 13/121
SiemIndus
13/122
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA 6P submersible
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesSelection
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/149, 13/56
Components:
Switch body_NEMA type 6P submersible:
Operating heads :
Plug-in module Catalog NumberList Price $1 unit
Plug-in module
Standard single pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE03-SA 48.00
Standard double pole 2 NO + 2 NC 3SE03-SB 63.00
Center neutral 2 NO + 2 NC 3SE03-SN 66.00
Receptacle
Receptacle for plug-in module Catalog NumberList Price $1 unit
Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC (5 terminals) 3SE03-RA 12.00
Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC (9 terminals) 3SE03-RB 18.00
Prewired cable
Prewired cable 8 foot lengthPrewired receptacle with pin connector
Switch body Catalog NumberList Price $1 unit Catalog Number
List Price $1 unit
Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE03-SA6P 90.00 _
Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC 3SE03-SB6P 150.00 _
_
Prewired receptacle
Single pole 1 NO + 1 NC 3SE03-SA6PC 109.00
Single pole 2 NO + 2 NC _
_
3SE03-SB6PC 185.00
Operating head type
Nominal operating data
Total travel Pretravel
Operating force
Release position
Minimum return force
Operating temp range
Catalog Number
List Price $1 unit
Side rotary
Standard momentary 90° 5° 3 lb-in. 2° 4.5 oz-in. 1 3SE03-DR1 44.00
Low torqued momentary 90° 15° 1.5 lb-in. 6° 2.5 oz-in. 1 3SE03-DL1 56.00
Standard maintained 90° 50° 3 lb-in. 50° _ 2 3SE03-DM1 70.00
Plain side plunger Momentary 0.25 in. 0.065 in. 4 lbs 0.03 in. 8 oz. 2 3SE03-DS1 62.00
Roller side plunger Momentary 0.25 in. 0.065 in. 4 lbs 0.03 in. 8 oz. 2 3SE03-DS3 75.00
Two-sided plunger Maintained 0.32 in. 0.2 in. 5 lbs 5 lbs 5 lbs 2 3SE03-DH1 81.00
Plain top plunger Momentary 0.28 in. 0.04 in. 4 lbs 0.02 in. 8 oz. 3 3SE03-DT1 54.00
Roller top plunger Momentary 0.28 in. 0.04 in. 4 lbs 0.02 in. 8 oz. 3 3SE03-DT3 68.00
Wobble head Momentary 15° 10° 2 lb-in. 6° 2.4 oz-in. 3 3SE03-DW1 49.00
Center neutral Momentary90°
90°
5°
15°
1.8 lbs
1.8 lbs
2°
2°
2.5 oz-in.
2.5 oz-in.
2
23SE03-DN1
3SE03-DN2
49.00
49.00
For use with 3SE03-DN1, -DN2 operating heads and 3SE03-RB receptacle only.
For use with modular, Plug-in and NEMA Type 6P.
Refer to “Operating Temperature”, Catalog page 13/118 for Temperature Ranges.Without Operating Levers.CW and CCW operation. Convertible to CW or CCW op-eration only.
Convertible—Horizontal to Vertical.Requires Lever.For use with 3SE03-SN plug-in module only.
_
_
_
06IC13_119-124.qxd 11/29/05 7:47 PM Page 13/122
13/123
Non-safetyModular, plug-in metal housing
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesSelection
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Inc.talog
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/150, 13/57
Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions—most widely used
Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions:
Description Length
Roller mounted on side of lever
Roller material
Rollerdiameter
Roller face width
Max requiredreturn torque (oz-in.)
Catalog Number
List Price $1 unit
Roller crank lever
1.5 (38) Front Nylatron 0.75 (19) 0.31 (8) 0.53 3SX03-KL200 13.00
1.5 (38) Front Cast aluminum 0.75 (19) 0.31 (8) 1.10 3SX03-KL355 13.00
1.5 (38) Back Cast aluminum 0.75 (19) 0.31 (8) 1.10 3SX03-KL579 13.00
Fork lever 1.5 (38) Back / back Nylatron 0.75 (19) 0.31 _ 3SX03-KL204 20.00
Adjustableradiuslever
1–3.5 (25–89)
1–3.5 (25–89)
Front
Front
Nylatron
Metal
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
1.90
3.40
3SX03-KL201
3SX03-KL538
16.00
16.00
Rod lever 9 (229) _ Stainless steel _ _ 7.00 3SX03-KL220 16.00
Adjustablespring rod
12.125 (308) _ Nylon _ _ 3.50 3SX03-KL556 16.00
Flexible loop lever
6 (152) _ Nylatron _ _ 0.40 3SX03-KL142 16.00
Levers
Rod _ _ Nylon _ _ _ 3SX03-KW2 13.00
Coil spring _ _ Coil spring _ _ _ 3SX03-KW4 13.00
For plunger actuated switches wobble actuators
Operator Length
Roller Max requiredreturn torque (oz-in.)
Catalog Number List Price $1 unitType Diameter Face (width) Stainless steel Cast aluminum
Standard lever
Cast aluminum
0.87 (22) Metal 0.75 (19) 0.31 (8) 0.62 _ 3SX03-KL39 13.00
1.37 (35) Metal 0.75 (19) 0.31 (8) 0.95 _ 3SX03-KL40 13.00
1.50 (38)NylatronBall bearingWithout roller
0.75 (19)0.69 (17)_
1.00 (25)0.25 (6)_
0.920.770.32
_
_
_
3SX03-KL3373SX03-KL5313SX03-KL32
22.0031.00
9.00
2.00 (51)
NylatronNylatronMetalBall bearing
0.75 (19)0.75 (19)0.75 (19)0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)1.00 (25)0.31 (8)0.25 (6)
0.711.451.51.1
_
_
_
_
3SX03-KL5463SX03-KL5723SX03-KL5493SX03-KL552
22.0031.0022.0031.00
250 (64)
NylatronNylatronNylatronMetalBall bearing
0.75 (19)0.75 (19)1.5 (38)0.75 (19)0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)1.00 (25)0.28 (7)0.31 (8)0.25 (6)
1.01.81.42.01.5
_
_
_
_
_
3SX03-KL5473SX03-KL5733SX03-KL5753SX03-KL5503SX03-KL553
22.0031.0031.0022.0031.00
3.00 (76)
NylatronNylatronNylatronMetalBall bearing
0.75 (19)0.75 (19)1.5 (38)0.75 (19)0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)1.00 (25)0.28 (7)0.31 (8)0.25 (6)
1.32.31.82.51.8
_
_
_
_
_
3SX03-KL5483SX03-KL5743SX03-KL5763SX03-KL5513SX03-KL554
22.0031.0031.0022.0031.00
All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purposes only. Not to be used for de-sign or construction purposes.Roller lever: Length from the operating shaft axis to the roller axis.All other: Length from the operating shaft axis to the tip.
Caution—When selecting lever, required return torque should not exceed minimum return torque in operating head.Cap screw accommodates 3/64 inch Allen wrench.By re-assembling lever minimum can be reduced an-other 0.50 (13).
Applies when lever extended to maximum dimension.See dimensions page 13/128.
06IC13_119-124.qxd 11/29/05 6:58 PM Page 13/123
Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions—most widely used
Levers for plug-in and non-plug-in versions:
OperatorLength
Inches (mm)
Roller Min.required return torque oz-in
Catalog Number
TypeDiameter In. (mm)
Face width in. (mm)
Stainlesssteel
Castaluminum
List Price $1 unit
Roller levers
Cast aluminum Roller on reverse side
1.50 (38) Nylatron
Nylatron
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
1.5 (38)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
0.28 (7)
0.25 (6)
0.53
0.96
0.77
_
_
_
3SX03-KL310
3SX03-KL536
3SX03-KL580
13.00
22.00
31.00
Stainless steel Offset lever (Inboard roller shown)
1.50 (38)
Inboard roller
Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
0.65
1.20
0.90
3SX03-KL24
3SX03-KL25
3SX03-KL26
_
_
_
13.00
13.00
27.00
1.50 (38)
outboard roller
Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
Nylatron
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.75 (19)
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
1 (25)
0.65
1.20
0.90
1.10
3SX03-KL27
3SX03-KL28
3SX03-KL29
3SX03-KL30
_
_
_
_
13.00
13.00
27.00
22.00
Bantam lever 0.69 (18) Metal 0.88 (22) 0.19 (5) 0.45 3SX03-KL532 31.00
Precision adjustment
1.50 (38) Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
0.65
1.20
0.90
3SX03-KL340
3SX03-KL465
3SX03-KL535
66.00
66.00
66.00
Adjustableroller
1–3.75 (25–95)
1–3.75 (25–95)
1.62–3.75 (41–95)
0.50–3.75 (13–95)
1–3.75 (25–95)
0.50–3.75 (13–95)
Nylatron
Nylatron
Nylatron
Large nylatron
Ball bearing
Without roller
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
1.5 (38)
4 (102)
0.69 (17)
_
0.5 (13)
1 (25)
0.28 (7)
0.11 (3)
0.25 (6)
_
1.90
3.10
2.50
4.50
2.50
1.20
3SX03-KL599
3SX03-KL537
3SX03-KL443
3SX03-KL598
3SX03-KL539
3SX03-KL31
31.00
31.00
31.00
49.00
31.00
18.00
Fork lever _ both rollers one side
1.50 (38) Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
1 (25)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
_
_
_
3SX03-KL543
3SX03-KL544
3SX03-KL545
39.00
31.00
40.00
Fork lever _ both rollers outside, one side
1.50 (38) Nylatron
Metal
Ball bearing
0.75 (19)
0.75 (19)
0.69 (17)
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
0.25 (6)
_
_
_
3SX03-KL203
3SX03-KL541
3SX03-KL542
16.00
22.00
40.00
OperatorLength
Inches (mm)DescriptionInches (mm)
Min. required return force oz-in.
CatalogNumber
List Price $1 unit
Adjustable rod 5.50 (140) Max.5.50 (140) Max.8.75 (222) Max12 (305) Max.__
Nylon Rod—0.19 (5) Dia.Metal Rod—0.12 (3) Dia.Metal Rod (Square)—0.12 (3) Max.Steel (Formable) Rod—0.12 (3) Dia.Clamp Only—0.19 (5) HoleClamp Only—0.12 (3) Hole
0.400.922.205.00__
3SX03-KL3993SX03-KL2023SX03-KL5813SX03-KL2263SX03-KL353SX03-KL36
22.00
22.00
22.00
22.00
18.00
18.00
Spring rod 11.62 (295) Metal rod 2.80 3SX03-KL421 22.00
Adjustable wire 12.12 (308) max.
Nylon covered wire 1.50 3SX03-KL533 22.00
Adjustable wide roller lever
3.9 (99) 0.75 (19) Dia. Nylatron Roller
0.19 (30) Dia. Rod
4.50 3SX03-KL37 49.00
Wobble head operators
See dimensions page 13/128 Stainless steel rod _ Rod diameter - 0.06 (2) _ 3SX03-KW3 9.00
Applies when lever extended to maximum dimension. Caution—When selecting lever, required return torque should not exceed minimum return force in operating head.
Length from operating shaft axis to the roller axis. Maximum dimensions, precision adjustable to lesser dimensions.
By re-assembling lever minimum can be reduced by 1/2 in.
All dimensions shown in inches and (millimeters). For reference purposes only. Not to be used for design or construction purposes.
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/151, 13/58
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Selection3SE03 North American Limit Switches
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible
13/124
06IC13_119-124.qxd 11/29/05 6:58 PM Page 13/124
13/125
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesWiring
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Wiring diagrams
Typical connector cable (supplied by user)
Single Pole1 NO - 1 NC
Modular, plug-in and prewired cable
Prewired receptacle with pin connector
Double Pole1 NO - 1 NC
Red/Blk 1
Orange 3
Blue 4
Grn/Blk 2
Green
6
3 4
8 92 5
1 7
Gnd
6 Red
7 Black
8 White
5 Wht/Blk
Cable color code1 - White 6 - Pink2 - Black 7 - Yellow3 - Red 8 - Blue4 - Orange 9 - Green5 - Brown
Pre-wired cable
Cable lengthft.
Manufacturers part number
DanielWoodheadBrad Harrison
CooperCrouse-Hinds
Molex(Industrial Interface) Lumberg USA
5 Pin connector cable
3612
105000A01F030105000A01F060105000A01F120
5000111-3_5000111-4_5000111-5_
145411454214544
RK50-77/1MRK50-77/2MRK50-77/4M
9 Pin connector cable
3612
309000A01F030309000A01F060309000A01F120
X8990-3X8990-4X8990-5
___
___
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/153, 13/60
06IC13_125-130.qxd 11/1/05 2:49 PM Page 13/125
13/126
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesDimensions
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/154, 13/61
06IC13_125-130.qxd 10/31/05 3:46 PM Page 13/126
13/127
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesDimensions
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/155, 13/62
06IC13_125-130.qxd 10/31/05 3:47 PM Page 13/127
13/128
Non-safetyModular, plug-in and NEMA type 6P submersible
3SE03 North American Limit SwitchesDimensions
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
SiemIndus
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/156, 13/63
06IC13_125-130.qxd 10/31/05 3:47 PM Page 13/128
13/129
3SE03Metal enclosure
3SE03 North American Enclosed SwitchesSelection
Inc.talog
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio:
Description
Features
• NEMA 1 Enclosed Aluminum Die Cast Housing
• Screw Terminals
• Booted versions for added protection
• 1/2" Conduit Entrance
• NEMA A600, R300 Contacts
• UL Recognized
• CSA Certified
• INO/INC Snap-action contacts (form c)
Application
These switches are designed for accurate repeatability. Their compact size makes them ideal for use in space-restricted areas.
Typical applications include overhead, folding and elevator doors, sliding gates and other automated equipment.
Overall dimensions Specifications CatalogNumber
List Price $ 1 unit
Plunger actuator
OF Max. - 8.82 - 12.3 oz. (250 - 350 g)RF Min. 4.02 oz. (114 g)PT Max. - 0.016 in. (0.4 mm)OT Min. - 0.217 in. (5.5 mm)MD Max. - 0.002 in. (0.05 mm)OP - 1.504 in. (38.2 mm)
3SE03 - EB05 24.00
Booted plunger
OF Max. - 28.22 oz. (800 g)RF Min. 8.46 oz. (240 g)PT Max. - 0.079 in. (2.0 mm)OT Min. - 0.197 in. (5.0 mm)MD Max. - 0.004 in. (0.1 mm)OP - 1.803 in. (45.8 mm)
3SE03 - EB06 28.00
Roller lever
OF Max. - 20.1 oz. (570 g)RF Min. 6.0 oz. (170 g)PT Max. - 0.157 in. (4.0 mm)OT Min. - 0.236 in. (6.0 mm)MD Max. - 0.016 in. (0.4 mm)
3SE03 - EB32 35.00
Booted roller lever
OF Max. - 22.57 oz. (640 g)RF Min. 8.11 oz. (230 g)PT Max. - 0.197 in. (5.0 mm)OT Min. - 0.236 in. (6.0 mm)MD Max. - 0.016 in. (0.4 mm)
3SE03 - EB33 41.00
OF = Operating ForceRF = Return ForcePT = PretravelOT = Operating TravelMD = Movement DifferentialOP = Operating Position
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/157, 13/64
06IC13_125-130.qxd 11/30/05 11:45 PM Page 13/129
13/130
3SE03Metal enclosure
3SE03 North American Enclosed SwitchesSpecifications
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.Industrial Controls Catalog
Siemens / Industrial Controls Previous folio: 9/158, 13/65
Discount Code: Limit Switches
Dimension drawings
1) Inductive load has power factor of 0.04 minimum (AC) and a time of 7m/second (DC)
2) Lamp load has an inrush current of 6 times steady-state current.
Overall dimensions Specifications Catalog Number List Price $1 unit
Roller plunger
OF Max. - 9.92 - 12.3 oz. (250 - 350 g)RF Min. 4.02 oz. (114 g)PT Max. - 0.02 in. (0.5 mm)OT Min. - 0.142 in. (3.6 mm)MD Max. - 0.002 in. (0.05 mm)OP - 1.957 in. (49.7 mm)
3SE03 - EB07 35.00
Booted roller plunger
OF Max. - 17.64 oz. (500 g)RF Min. 3.53 oz. (100 g)PT Max. - 0.039 in. (1.0 mm)OT Min. - 0.138 in. (3.5 mm)MD Max. - 0.006 in. (0.12 mm)OP - 1.957 in. (49.7 mm)
3SE03 - EB08 41.00
Technical data
Mechanical Life 3,000,000 operations maximum
Electrical Life 500,000 operations minimum
Operating Speed 0.01 m/second to 1m/second
Cable Entry 1/2" NPT
Temperature Range -15° to 80° (5° to 176°F)
Degree of Protection NEMA 1
Mounting Any Position
NEMA Rating A600, R300
Rated Voltage (V)1)2)Non-Inductive Load (A) Inductive load (A)
Inrush current (A)Resistive load Lamp load Inductive load Motor loadNC-NO NO NC NC-NO NO NC NO NC
125 VAC 15 3 1.5 15 5 2.5
30 maximum 15 maximum
250 VAC 15 2.5 1.25 15 3 1.5
500 VAC 3 1.5 0.75 2.5 1.5 0.75
8 VDC 15 3 1.5 15 5 2.5
14 VDC 15 3 1.5 10 5 2.5
30 VDC 6 (2) 3 1.5 5 5 2.5
125 VDC 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.05 0.05 0.05
250 VDC 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.03 0.03 0.03
06IC13_125-130.qxd 11/30/05 11:45 PM Page 13/130